Sunteți pe pagina 1din 418

ProSteelV8iMicroStation

ProfessionalFundamentals
(metric)

BentleyInstituteCourseGuide

TRN017720-1/0002

TrademarkNotice
Bentleyandthe"B"Bentleylogoareeitherregisteredorunregisteredtrademarksor
servicemarksofBentleySystems,Incorporated.Allothermarksarethepropertyoftheir
respectiveowners.
AccuDraw,MDL,MicroStation,andSmartLineareregisteredtrademarks;PopSetand
RasterManageraretrademarks.
AutoCADisaregisteredtrademarkofAutodesk,Inc.

CopyrightNotice
Copyright2012,BentleySystems,Incorporated.AllRightsReserved.

ProSteel V8i MicroStation Professional Fundamentals

Copyright 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

TableofContents
ProSteelV8iProfessionalFundamentalsOverview ________ 9
CourseDescription ____________________________________ 9

ProSteelV8iMicroStationModelingFundamentals ________ 11
ModelingFundamentalsOverview _____________________ 13
CourseDescription ____________________________________ 13
WhatisProSteelV8i? __________________________________ 13
Prerequisites _________________________________________ 13
CourseObjectives _____________________________________ 14
ModulesIncluded _____________________________________ 14

SeedFileandModelSetup ____________________________ 15
ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 15
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 15
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 15
IntroductoryKnowledge ________________________________ 16
Questions ________________________________________ 16
Answers__________________________________________ 16
TrainingDatasetInstallation _____________________________ 17
ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation ____________________ 18
Units&MeasurementValues_________________________ 20
ProSteelOptions(DefaultSettings) ____________________ 21
ModuleReview _______________________________________ 40
Questions ________________________________________ 40
Answers__________________________________________ 41
ModuleSummary _____________________________________ 42

ViewingandMovingAroundtheModel _________________ 43
ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 43
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 43
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 43
IntroductoryKnowledge ________________________________ 44
Questions ________________________________________ 44
Answers__________________________________________ 45

Mar-12

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Lesson1:UtilizingStructuralViewTools____________________ 46
GlobalViews ______________________________________ 46
ChangingtheModelView____________________________ 47
Lesson2:UnderstandingandManipulatingClippingPlanes ____ 51
ModuleReview _______________________________________ 53
Questions ________________________________________ 53
Answers__________________________________________ 54

DrawingandEditingShapesandWorkframes ____________ 55
ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 55
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 55
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 55
IntroductoryKnowledge ________________________________ 56
Questions ________________________________________ 56
Answers__________________________________________ 57
HandleEditing ________________________________________ 58
DrawingSteelShapesintheModel _______________________ 62
EditingSteelShapesandPlates___________________________ 72
ModuleReview _______________________________________ 80
Questions ________________________________________ 80
Answers__________________________________________ 81

CreatingaWorkframe _______________________________ 83
ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 83
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 83
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 83
IntroductoryKnowledge ________________________________ 84
Questions ________________________________________ 84
Answers__________________________________________ 85
CreatingaWorkframeandReviewSettings _________________ 86
CreatingandManipulatingDisplayClasses,AreaClasses
andPartFamilies ______________________________________ 98
DisplayClasses ____________________________________ 98
AreaClasses ______________________________________ 100
PartFamilies ______________________________________ 101
NorthDirection _______________________________________ 104
UserDefinedPartDescription ________________________ 106
UserDefinedtemplates _____________________________ 107
ModuleReview _______________________________________ 109
Questions ________________________________________ 109
Answers__________________________________________ 110

InsertingandManipulatingShapes _____________________ 111


ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 111
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 111

Mar-12

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 111
IntroductoryKnowledge ________________________________ 112
Questions ________________________________________ 112
Answers__________________________________________ 113
InsertingSteelShapesUsingtheLine ______________________ 114
AssigningSteelMemberstoaDisplayClass _________________ 118
InsertingSteelShapesUsingthe2PointMethod_____________ 119
ModuleReview _______________________________________ 122
Questions ________________________________________ 122
Answers__________________________________________ 122

CreatingConnectionsBetweenElements ________________ 123


ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 123
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 123
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 123
IntroductoryKnowledge ________________________________ 124
Questions ________________________________________ 124
Answers__________________________________________ 125
CreatingaBasicEndPlateConnection _____________________ 126
ModifyingConnectionsUsingEditing ______________________ 139
ModuleReview _______________________________________ 145
Questions ________________________________________ 145
Answers__________________________________________ 146

CreatingBasePlatesandCrossBracing __________________ 147


ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 147
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 147
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 147
CreatingBasePlatesonColumns _________________________ 148
DrillingtheBasePlatetoAccommodateAnchorBolts_________ 156
CreationofDynamicandStaticBracings ___________________ 162
ModuleReview _______________________________________ 173
Questions ________________________________________ 173
Answers__________________________________________ 174

PurlinCourses,WebAnglesandShearPlateConnections ___ 175


ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 175
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 175
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 175
IntroductoryKnowledge ________________________________ 176
Questions ________________________________________ 176
Answers__________________________________________ 177
CreatingthePurlins ____________________________________ 178
CopingtheBeamandAddingWebAngleConnections ________ 198

Mar-12

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

StructuralElements__________________________________ 201
ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 201
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 201
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 202
CreatingtheHandrail __________________________________ 203
CreatingtheStairs _____________________________________ 209
LadderandFrameStructuralElements_____________________ 218
CreatingCustomWorkframes(View) ______________________ 224

Extras _____________________________________________ 227


ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 227
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 227
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 227
UserCreatedShapes ___________________________________ 228
StandardUserShape ___________________________________ 229
Roof&WallPanels ____________________________________ 234
CombinedShapes _____________________________________ 234
WeldedShapes _______________________________________ 239
ExporttoPureMicroStation _____________________________ 244
CentreofGravity ______________________________________ 244
CollisionDetection_____________________________________ 245
Unfold ______________________________________________ 246

ProSteelV8iMicroStationDetailingFundamentals ________ 249


DetailingFundamentalsOverview ______________________ 251
CourseDescription ____________________________________ 251
TargetAudience_______________________________________ 251
Prerequisites _________________________________________ 252
CourseObjectives _____________________________________ 252
ModulesIncluded _____________________________________ 252

UserDefinedStylesandSymbols_______________________ 255
ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 255
Lesson1:UserDefinedStyles ____________________________ 255
BoltStyle _________________________________________ 256
DetailStyle___________________________________________ 260
ElevationFlagStyle _________________________________ 260
PositionFlagStyle __________________________________ 261
WeldFlagStyle ____________________________________ 261
Lesson2:UserDefinedSymbols __________________________ 264
Benchmarksymbol(northdirection) ___________________ 264
ElevationFlagsSymbol ______________________________ 266
GridTextBlocksSymbol _____________________________ 267
ManualCutSymbol_________________________________ 268

Mar-12

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

PositionFlagsSymbol _______________________________ 269


WeldFlagsSymbol _________________________________ 269

ProSteelGrouping ___________________________________ 271


ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 271
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 271
Lesson1:ProSteelGrouping _____________________________ 272
Grouping _________________________________________ 272
Assemblies________________________________________ 272
Groups___________________________________________ 272
Lesson2:PartsinaGroup _______________________________ 278
Lesson3:ControllingModelDisplayviatheGroupsFunction ___ 279
Lesson4:AddingComponentPartstoaGroup ______________ 282

CreatingandManipulatingPartFamilies ________________ 283


ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 283
ModulesObjectives ____________________________________ 283
Lesson1:CreatingandManipulatingPartFamilies ___________ 284
PartFamilies ______________________________________ 284
Lesson2:UserdefinedPartDescription____________________ 287

PositioningandMaterialTakeoffs ______________________ 291


ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 291
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 291
Lesson1:PositioningtheModel __________________________ 292
Lesson2:CreatinganExternalPartsList____________________ 307
Lesson3:CreatingaDrawingPartsList_____________________ 315
ModuleSummary _____________________________________ 323

DetailCenter _______________________________________ 325


ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 325
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 326
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 326
Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre ________ 327
WhatistheDetailCenter?____________________________ 328
Level1:ThePartsTabOverview_______________________ 329
Level2:TheViewsTabOverview ______________________ 334
Level3:TheInsertTab(DetailBlock)Overview ___________ 337
Lesson2:AssigningaViewtoaStyleandCreatinga
2DDeliverableDrawing_________________________________ 346
Objectives ________________________________________ 346
Lesson3:ModifyingtheModelandAutomatically
UpdatingtheDetailDrawings ____________________________ 361
Objectives ________________________________________ 361

Mar-12

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

DetailStyles________________________________________ 363
ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 363
SavingStyles ______________________________________ 363
PartialLoadingofStyleParameters ____________________ 364
ModulePrerequisites __________________________________ 364
ModuleObjectives_____________________________________ 364
Example1:AnchorPlan_________________________________ 365
Example2:SinglePartDetailStyle_________________________ 373
SampleShapeDetailDrawing_________________________ 376
Example3:BeamGroupDetail ___________________________ 377
Example4:MarkingElevationDetail ______________________ 383

AppendixABentleyProSteelCourseSetup _____________ 387


ModuleOverview _____________________________________ 387
ViewTools ___________________________________________ 387
ElementTools ________________________________________ 390
EditTools ____________________________________________ 392
UtilityTools __________________________________________ 395
DetailStyleDialogs ____________________________________ 397

Mar-12

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Table of Contents

ProSteelV8iProfessional
FundamentalsOverview
CourseDescription
TheProSteelV8iMicroStationProfessionalFundamentalscourseiscomposedof
twoparts:ModelingFundamentalsandDetailingFundamentals.
ModelingFundamentalsallowsyoutomodelyouractualstructureinamanner
similartoactualerectionofthestructure.Thismodelisthenusedbytheprogram
toautomaticallygeneratetherequired2Dshopdrawings.
Afteryouhavecreatedamodel,completedyouredits,andpossiblyissueda
preliminarypartslist,thecreationsofthe2Dlayouts(plan,elevationsand
sectionsofthebuilding)canbegin.ThiswillbecoveredintheDetailing
Fundamentalspartofthiscourse.

Mar-12

ProSteel V8i Professional Fundamentals Overview

Copyright 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Course Description

ProSteel V8i Professional Fundamentals Overview

10

Copyright 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ProSteelV8iMicroStation
ModelingFundamentals

ProSteelV8i

BentleyInstituteCourseGuide

ProSteel V8i MicroStation Modeling Fundamentals

12

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ModelingFundamentals
Overview
CourseDescription
ThischapterprovidesanoverviewoftheBentleyProSteelV8iMicroStation
Modelingcourse.

WhatisProSteelV8i?
BentleyProSteelV8i(PSV8i)isastructuralsteelconstructionapplicationfor
AutoCAD.IfyouhavepreviouslyusedtraditionalAutoCADtoolsorother2D
applicationstocreatesteelconstructiondrawings,youwillneedtoadjusttoa
newmethodofcreatingdrawings.ProSteel3Dallowsyoutomodelyouractual
structureinamannersimilartoactualerectionofthestructure.Thismodelis
thenusedbytheprogramtoautomaticallygeneratetherequired2Dshop
drawings.
Inthiscourse,youwillcoverthebasicsoftheProSteelModelingfunctionalityand
howtotakeadvantageofMicroStationtoolswhileusingProSteel.

Prerequisites

Mar-12

Engineeringbackgroundinstructuralsteelconstruction

AfundamentalknowledgeorpreviouscourseinMicroStation3Dis
advantageous

13
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Modeling Fundamentals Overview

Course Objectives

CourseObjectives
Aftercompletingthiscourse,youwillbeableto:

UseProSteelV8iModelingsuccessfullyonaproject

ModulesIncluded
Thefollowingmodulesareincludedinthiscourse:

TemplatesandModelSetup

ViewingandMovingAroundtheModel

DrawingandEditingShapesandWorkframes

CreatingaWorkframe

InsertingandManipulatingShapes

CreatingConnectionsBetweenElements

CreatingBasePlatesandCrossBracing

ConstructionGroups

PurlinCourses,WebAngles,andShearPlateConnections

StructuralElements

PositioningandMaterialTakeoffs

CreatingDrawings

Modeling Fundamentals Overview

14

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

SeedFileandModelSetup
ModuleOverview
ThismodulecoversthecreationoftheProSteelMicroStationprojectand
establishingaMicroStationdgnseedfileusedwhenstartinganewBentley
ProSteelV8imodel.Inaddition,youwilllearnhowtosetProSteelV8ioptions
and/ordefaultsettings.

ModulePrerequisites

BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationetc.

Previousexperiencewitha3DCADsystem,preferablyMicroStationV8i

ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:

Mar-12

Installthetrainingdataset

EstablishtheProSteelprojectforMicroStation

StartProSteelforMicroStation

OpentheSeedmodeldgn

BecomeknowledgeableoftheUnitsofMeasureandDesignFileworkingunits
andhowtheyrelate

AccesstheProSteelOptionsdialog

Learnwhatiscontrolledbythesettingsinthisdialogandhowtoobtainhelp
forfurtherexplanation

15
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Seed File and Model Setup

Introductory Knowledge

IntroductoryKnowledge
Beforeyoubeginthismodule,let'sdefinewhatyoualreadyknow.

Questions
1

HowdoyoustartaWindowsExplorersession?

HowdoyoucreateanewfolderinWindows?

InMicroStationaLevelisequivalenttoa______inAutoCAD?

InMicroStation,aLineStyleisequivalentto_____inAutoCAD?

Answers
1

HowdoyoustartaWindowsExplorersession?
RightmouseclickontheWindowsStartbutton,thenselectExplore.

HowdoyoucreateanewfolderinWindows?
Navigatetothelocationofwhereyouwantthenewfoldertoresideand
rightmouseclickinablankareaoftherighthandcolumnofthe
WindowsExplorersession.ThenselectNew,thenFolder.

InMicroStationaLevelisequivalenttoaLayerinAutoCAD.

InMicroStationaLineStyleisequivalenttoLineTypeinAutoCAD.

Seed File and Model Setup

16

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

TrainingDatasetInstallation

TrainingDatasetInstallation
Thistopicwillcovertheinstallationofthetrainingdatasetandtheestablishment
oftheProSteelProjectforMicroStation.

Exercise:Installingthetrainingdataset
1

CreateanewfolderinC:namedProSteelWorkspaceTemp

MovethedeliveredWorkspace.zipintothenewfolder

RightmouseclickontheWorkspace.zipanddoan"ExtractHere"fromthe
rightclickmenu

NavigateintheWorkspacefolderto
C:\ProSteelWorkSpaceTemp\WorkSpace\Projects\Examples

OpenanotherWindowsExplorersession

Inthenewwindow,navigatetoC:\DocumentsandSettings\All
Users\ApplicationData\Bentley\MicroStation\WorkSpace
\Projects\Examples

CopytheProSteelFolderandtheProSteel.pcffrom
C:\ProSteelWorkSpaceTemp\WorkSpace\Projects\Examplesto
C:\DocumentsandSettings\AllUsers\ApplicationData\
Bentley\MicroStation\WorkSpace\Projects\Examples

Yourwindowshouldlookliketheoneabove.ThisestablishestheProSteel
ProjectforMicroStation.

Mar-12

17

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Seed File and Model Setup

Program Startup and Seed File Creation

ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation
ThistopiccoversstartingProSteelV8iandopeningthemodelseedfile.
ProSteelV8ihasallthecapabilitiesofMicroStation,plusfeaturesthataccelerate
andeaseworkingonmodelsofsteelstructures.

Exercise:StartingProSteel
1

StartProSteel(WindowsStartmenu>AllPrograms>ProSteelV8i)or
doubleclicktheProSteelV8iicononyourdesktop.

IntheFileopendialog,setthefollowing:

User:examples

Project:ProSteel

Interface:default

Lookin:ProSteelseed,thenopentraining_ProSteel3D_V8i_Metric.dgn

Note:IntheLookinareaoftheFileOpendialog,youmightneedtonavigate

uponeleveltotheProSteelfolderandthentotheseedfolder.
3

IftheinitialseedfilewerenotaProSteelseedfilesuchasoneofthe3D
seedfilesdeliveredwithMicroStation,thefollowingdialogwillappear.If
thishappens,selectMetric(MeasurementUnit)forthistraining.However,
iftheprojectisinimperialunitstheoptiontosetupfortheseunitsis
providedhere.

Seed File and Model Setup

18

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation

MicroStationwillstartandloadtheProSteelV8i
menuandtoolbars,whichprovidesaccesstoan
integratedsetofProSteelDesignapplications
andsupplementalutilities.

Mar-12

19

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Seed File and Model Setup

Program Startup and Seed File Creation

Units&MeasurementValues
ThistopicprovidesintroductoryknowledgetoUnitsofMeasureusedbyProSteel
andhowtheyrelatetoMicroStationDesignFileWorkingUnits.
ProSteelusesMicroStationunits,soyoumustsetyourunitsasyounormallydo
withMicroStation.Keepinmindyouwillhavetosettheunitsforthe3Dmodel
andthe2Ddrawingfiles.Thiscanbeachievedinadvanceofmodelordrawing
creationbypreparingdgnseedfilesformodellingandfor2Ddrawings.
ConsequentlyProSteelalsoneedsanothervariabletobesetproperlyinorderto
beabletoinsertthesteelshapesintheproperdimensions.Letusexplainhere
howitallworks.
ShapeDatabasesarepopulatedwithalltheinformationneededtobuildeach
steelshape.Theinformationintheshape'sdatabasesiseitherinmetricor
imperialvalues.ProSteelknowswhichsystemwasusedineachdatabasethanks
totheshapeconfiguration.
Onceinsideadgnfile,ProSteelneedstoknowwhatsystemisgoingtobeused
there.
Asaresult,ProSteelcannowtellifitneedstoconvertthesizeofashapereadon
ametricdatabasetobeinsertedintoametric(noconversionneeded)oran
imperial(25.4scaledownfactor)model.
Thesetwosettings(Units&Measurement)areveryimportantinProSteel.We
stronglyrecommendyousettheseupinsideaseedfileforeachpossible
combinationyoumightneedsoyoudonotneedtoworryaboutiteveragain.

Exercise:SettheDesignFileWorkingunits
1

TosettheDesignfileworkingunitsgotoSetting>Designfile>Working
Unitssetasbelow.

Seed File and Model Setup

20

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation

Note:Oncethemodelisstartedineithermeasurementsystem,itcannotbe

convertedtotheothermeasurementsystem.

ProSteelOptions(DefaultSettings)
ThistopicwilldiscussProSteelsetupoptionsanddemonstratehowtoaccessthe
OptionsDialog.Itwillalsorevealhowtoobtainadditionalinformationonthe
varioussettings.
HerewewilltakealookattheProSteelV8isettingsdonewithinProSteelV8i.
KeepinmindthatbecauseProSteelV8ineedstodifferentiatemetricfrom
imperialdrawings,thesesettingsexistindouble.
WhenProSteelV8iinstallsitshouldbydefaultgiveyouaccesstothetemplates
includedintheinstallation.
Youcanmodifythesesettingsandsavethemastemplatesforeachdifferent
situationthatyouneed(perproject,perclient,perjob,etc).

Mar-12

Exercise:AccessingtheSettings
1

Thetraining_ProSteel3D_V8i_Metric.dgnshouldstillbeopen.Ifnot,
reopenusingProSteel.

OpentheProSteelOptions(ProSteelV8imenu>ProSteelOptions)dialog
shownbelow.

21

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Seed File and Model Setup

Program Startup and Seed File Creation

Thismultitabbeddialogcontainsthedefaultsettingsdata,orglobal
settingsinformation,forthemodel.
3

AssigntheOptionsoptionparametersshownbelow,thengotothenext
selectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

OK...SaveschangestothesettingsmodifiedinanysectionoftheDialog
madeafterthedialogwereopenedlast.TheusermustalsodoaFile>
SaveSettingsbeforeexitingtheMicroStationsessiontomaintainthe
settingschanges.
CancelsanychangesmadesinceopeningthedialogandafterthelastOK.
OpenstheProSteelHelpdocumentpertinenttothesettingsinthedialog.
Providesamethodofsavingthesettingstoatemplateforuselater.

Seed File and Model Setup

22

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation

AssigntheGripsoptionparametersshownbelow,thengotothenext
selectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

AssigntheShapesoptionparametersshownbelow,thengotothenext
selectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

Mar-12

23

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Seed File and Model Setup

Program Startup and Seed File Creation

AssigntheShapeLabeloptionparametersshownbelow,thengotothe
nextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

TextSizeandDistancearerelativeto1MasterUnit(MU)inthe
MicroStationdgn.
7

AssigntheSketchDisplayoptionparametersshownbelow,thengotothe
nextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

Seed File and Model Setup

24

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation

AssigntheNamingConventionsoptionparametersasshownbelow,then
gotothenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

Hint: DialogsinMicroStationareWindowscompliant.Thisenablesthemtobe

"rippedoutof"theMicroStationsessionwindowandmakescomparingwhatis
beingdisplayedintheMicroStationdialogtothegraphicabovemucheasierby
bringingthedialogclosertothegraphic.
9

AssigntheFlatSteelSelectionoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengo
tothenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

Mar-12

25

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Seed File and Model Setup

Program Startup and Seed File Creation

10 AssigntheStraightPlatesoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengoto

thenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

11 AssignthePlateLabeloptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothe

nextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

Seed File and Model Setup

26

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation

12 AssignthePlateDescriptionoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengo

tothenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

13 AssigntheCalculationMethodoptionparametersasshownbelow,then

gotothenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

Mar-12

27

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Seed File and Model Setup

Program Startup and Seed File Creation

14 AssigntheBoltsoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothenext

selectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

15 AssigntheWorkframeoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothe

nextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

Seed File and Model Setup

28

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation

16 AssigntheAssemblyoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothe

nextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

17 AssigntheValuesoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothenext

selectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

(Continuationbelow)

Mar-12

29

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Seed File and Model Setup

Program Startup and Seed File Creation

18 AssigntheLogicalLinksoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothe

nextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
Note: The"allowadditionaldata"checkboxaffectsonlytheDetailCenter.

Seed File and Model Setup

30

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation

19 AssigntheRevisionCheckoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengoto

thenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.
Note: Donotsettheseto"Asktodeletepositionnumbers".

20 AssigntheDisplayoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothenext

selectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

Mar-12

31

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Seed File and Model Setup

Program Startup and Seed File Creation

21 AssigntheColoursoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothenext

selectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

ColoursOptionssettingscontinued:

(Continuation)

Seed File and Model Setup

32

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation

22 AssigntheMonitorColoursoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengoto

thenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

Mar-12

33

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Seed File and Model Setup

Program Startup and Seed File Creation

23 AssigntheConfiguration/IsometricViewoptionparametersasshown

below,thengotothenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedall
settings.

24 AssigntheLayeroptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothenext

selectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

(Continuationbelow)

Seed File and Model Setup

34

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation

(Continuation)

Mar-12

35

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Seed File and Model Setup

Program Startup and Seed File Creation

25 AssigntheFlatSteelSelectionoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengo

tothenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

26 AssigntheDialogSettingsoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengoto

thenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

Seed File and Model Setup

36

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation

27 AssigntheTooltipsoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengotothe

nextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

28 AssigntheClasses/Familiesoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengo

tothenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

Mar-12

37

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Seed File and Model Setup

Program Startup and Seed File Creation

29 AssigntheMatchPropertiesoptionparametersasshownbelow,thengo

tothenextselectionorselectOKifyouhavecompletedallsettings.

30 Whenallofthesettingshavebeenset,pressOKtoapplyallofthesettings

totheProSteelmodel.
31 FromtheMicroStationFiledropdown,clickonFile>SaveSettings.
32 SetDialogSettingsoptiontoExpertMode.

AnadditionalfieldwillbeaddedtoProSteelOptions.

Seed File and Model Setup

38

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ProgramStartupandSeedFileCreation

Hint: Afterdoingsomeconfigurationsusingtheexpertmode,alwayssetitbackto

beginnermode.

Mar-12

39

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Seed File and Model Setup

Module Review

ModuleReview
Nowthatyouhavecompletedthismodule,let'smeasurewhatyouhavelearned.

Questions
1

WhatdirectoryisthedefaultlocationforMicroStationprojects?

Tomakeitmoreconvenienttocreatenewmodelfiles,whereshouldthe
ProSteelsetupoptionsbemade?

WherearetheDesignFileworkingunitsset?

Howcansomeoneobtainmorehelponexplainingthesetupoptions?

Seed File and Model Setup

40

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ModuleReview

Answers
1

WhatdirectoryisthedefaultlocationforMicroStationprojects?
C:\DocumentsandSettings\AllUsers\Application
Data\Bentley\MicroStation\WorkSpace\Projects

Tomakeitmoreconvenienttocreatenewmodelfiles,whereshouldthe
ProSteelsetupoptionsbemade?
IntheProjectSeedFile.Thenusetheseedfiletocreatenewmodels.

WherearetheDesignFileworkingunitsset?
FromtheMicroStationDropDownmenu,selectSettings>DesignFile>
WorkingUnits.

Howcansomeoneobtainmorehelponexplainingthesetupoptions?
ClickonthisiconintheProSteelOptionsdialog,whichwilltakeyou
directlytothesectionoftheProSteelHelppertainingtotheOptions
settings.

Mar-12

41

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Seed File and Model Setup

Module Summary

ModuleSummary
Youarenowableto:

Installthetrainingdataset

EstablishtheProSteelprojectforMicroStation

StartProSteelforMicroStation

OpentheSeedmodeldgn

SettheDesignFileworkingunitsandhaveanunderstandingofhowthey
relatetoProSteel'sUnitsofMeasure

AccesstheProSteelOptionsdialog

AdjustthesettingsintheProSteelOptionsdialogtosuityourparticular
projectneedsandknowhowtoobtainhelpforfurtherexplanationofthese
settings.

Seed File and Model Setup

42

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ViewingandMovingAround
theModel
ModuleOverview
Inthismodule,youwilllearnaboutProSteel'sViewmanipulationfunctions.The
ProSteeltoolsprovidedtoadjusttheMicroStationACSwillalsobecovered.
TherearetwoLessonsinthismodule.EachLessonbeginswithalistofobjectives
thatdefinetheinformationthatyouwilllearninthatLesson.Anumberof
ExercisesareprovidedineachLesson,whicharedesignedtoteachyouthestated
objectives.

ModulePrerequisites

BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationandsoforth

Previousexperiencewitha3DCADsystem,preferablyMicroStationV8i

Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended

ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:

Mar-12

Changetheviewofthemodel

Centerashapeintheview

SettheACSbyashapeeitheratapointorcenteredontheshape

UnderstandwhatClippingPlanesareandhowtheyaffecttheviewofthe
model

Turnclippingplanesonandoff

Changetheclippingplanedistancessoastochangetheresultantview

43

Viewing and Moving Around the Model

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Introductory Knowledge

IntroductoryKnowledge
Beforeyoubeginthismodule,let'sdefinewhatyoualreadyknow.

Questions
1

WhatisACSandwhatisitusedfor?

HowisaClippingPlaneusefulin3Ddesignwork?

IftheACSTriadwasn'tshowing,whichoftheoptionsbelowcouldyouuse
tomakeitvisible?

CloseMicroStationandhopeitbecomesvisiblewhenyourestart.

TurnontheACSleveltomakeitvisible.

EnableitsdisplayinViewAttributesDialog.

SetitintheDisplayTaboftheProSteelOptions.

Viewing and Moving Around the Model

44

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

IntroductoryKnowledge

Answers
1

WhatisACSandwhatisitusedfor?
AnAuxiliaryCoordinateSystem(ACS)isdefinedsothatyoucanplace
elementsonplanesatdifferentdepthsandorientations.

HowisaClippingPlaneusefulin3Ddesignwork?
FrontandBackClippingPlanesdefinethelimitsofvisibleelements,
effectivelystoppingyoufromseeinganythingthatisoutsideofthe
clippingplanes.
Itisusedtoremovethedisplayofunwantedelementsmakingiteasierto
focusonthoseelementsyouaredesigningormodifyingatthemoment.

IftheACSTriadwasn'tshowing,whichoftheoptionsbelowcouldyouuse
tomakeitvisible?

Mar-12

EnableitsdisplayinViewAttributesDialog.

45

Viewing and Moving Around the Model


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Lesson 1: Utilizing Structural View Tools

Lesson1:UtilizingStructuralViewTools
DifferenttypesofviewsareavailableinProSteelV8i.Someareautomatically
createdwhileothersareuserdefined/created;theyareallviewingtoolsserving
thesamepurposetomakeworkingina3Denvironmentmucheasierthanplain
MicroStationtools.Theseviewscan/willalsobeusedtocreateengineering2D
plans,elevations,andbuildingcrosssectionsaswellasfabricators'erection
drawings.

GlobalViews
ProSteelV8iprovidesfiveisometricviewpointsgeneratedaspersettingsinthe
ProSteelV8iGlobalSettingsdiscussedintheSeedFileandModelSetupmodule.
Wewillnowexplainhowthesesettingswork.

Viewing and Moving Around the Model

46

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:UtilizingStructuralViewTools

Theseviewscanbeusedtonavigateinthemodelaswellastogenerateisometric
viewsofthewholestructureorofindividualparts,assembliesorconnection
details.
Byclickinganyofthefiveprovidedviews,youwillnoticetheviewingdirectionof
themodelchangesaccordingtothosesettings.

ChangingtheModelView
Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtochangetheviewofthemodelutilizing
ProSteel'sOverviewandChooseViewcommands.

Mar-12

47

Viewing and Moving Around the Model


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Lesson 1: Utilizing Structural View Tools

Exercise:ChangingtheViewWithintheModel
1

OpentheVIEWMOD.dgntrainingdrawing(Filemenu>Open).

BrowsetotheDESIGNSdirectory.SelectVIEWMOD.DGNdrawingfileand
thenpressOpen.

Displaythemodelinanisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).

Tryouttheotherviewtoolsinthismenu.Additionalviewcommandsare
providedintheProSteelZoom/Viewtoolbar.Whenyouarefinished,
returnthedrawingtotheIsometricOverviewview.

Anotherveryeffectivemethodofchangingtheviewonthemodelisby
usingtheChooseViewcommand.Thisfunctioncontainspredefined
views,whichareautomaticallycreatedwhenaworkframeiscreated.This
simplifiestheprocessofviewingamodelfromanyofthestandard
directionalviews(e.g.,Front,Right,Leftetc.).

OpentheSelectViewdialog(ProSteelmenu>Zoom/Views>Choose
View)orclicktheSelectViewicon.

SelecttheF1_TOPview,andthenpresstheSettheCurrentViewbutton.
Noticehowtheviewischangedtomatchtheselectedviewname.Execute
theOverviewcommandandswitchbacktotheOverview1view.

SelecttheChooseViewcommandagain.SelecttheTOPviewandthen
pressSetACS.NoticehowtheACSischangedtotheviewbuttheviewof
themodeldoesnotchange.

Viewing and Moving Around the Model

48

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:UtilizingStructuralViewTools

Exercise:SwitchingtoanObjectView(ObjectViewTools)

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtoswitchtheviewinthemodelsoaselected
shapewillbesetasthecurrentviewandwillhavetheMicroStationACSsetto
thisshape.
1

OpentheBASICS_01.DGNtrainingdrawing(Filemenu>Open).Browseto
theDesignsdirectory.SelecttheBASICS_01.DGNfileandpressOpen.

Changetoviewtothecrosssectionofthebeam(UB203x133x25)
(ProSteelV8imenu>Zoom/Views>ObjectViewCentered)orclick
OverviewCenteredicon.

Mar-12

Pickthebeamlocatedattheanglewhosepartnameisdisplayed
(UB203x133x25).Whenpromptedwiththemulticoloureddirection
indicator,picktheaxishighlightedinyellowandthenclickyourleftmouse
buttontoaccepttheselection.

NoticehowtheACSisnowcenteredintheshapeandthemodelviewis
changedtothecrosssectionofthebeam.Experimentwiththisoptionby
pickingadifferentaxiswhenpromptedwiththedirectionindicator.
Noticethechangeinthemodelview.

49

Viewing and Moving Around the Model


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Lesson 1: Utilizing Structural View Tools

Exercise:SwitchingtheACStoanObject(ObjectACSTools)

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtomovetheMicroStationACStoanobjectata
specificpointwithoutchangingthemodelview.
1

Resettheviewtothestandardisometricview(clickIsometricOverview
icon).

CentertheACSontheUB356x171x57member(ProSteelV8imenu>
Zoom/Views>ObjectACScentered)orclickObjectACScenteredicon.
PickthesameUB356x171x57memberasabove,thenpickthesameleft
handaxis(yellow).ThistimenoticehowtheACSmovestotheobjectbut
theviewdoesnotchange.

Trythisagainandthistimepickadifferentaxisandnotethechangeofthe
ACSlocationandplane.

Viewing and Moving Around the Model

50

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson2:UnderstandingandManipulatingClippingPlanes

Lesson2:UnderstandingandManipulatingClippingPlanes
Inthissection,youwilllearnspecificallywhataClippingPlaneisandhowit
affectswhatyouseeinthemodel.
Workingwitha3Dmodelcanquicklybecomecomplex,especiallyifmanyparts
arespatiallystackedoroverlaponeanother.ByusingMicroStation"Clipping
Planes,"ProSteeloffersacommandtohidepartsinfrontofandbehindthe
currentworkplane,orthesocalledcuttingplane.
Thissimplifiestheconstructionprocesssignificantlysinceonlythoseobjects
approximatelyinthesameworkplanearevisible.Thispreventstheaccidental
manipulationofstackedshapes.Thetermapproximatelyisusedhereinthe
sensethatonlytheobjectswithintheClippingPlanescreatedarevisibletothe
frontandrear.
Ifoneofthedefinedviewsoranobjectviewisselected,thehideoptionis
activatedasthedefaultsettingunlessthecommandhasbeendeactivated
globally.
Thiscommandcanbeselectivelyactivatedordeactivatedtopermitviewingthe
depthsofallpartssimultaneouslyforageneraloverviewofthecomponentparts
ofthemodel(moreonthisinalaterexercise).

Mar-12

Exercise:WorkingwithClippingPlanes
1

OpentheVIEWMOD.DGNdrawing,changebacktothestandardisometric
view(clickIsometricOverviewicon).Noticethetwofronttorear
connectingmembers.Theelementontheleftsideoftheframeislowerin
elevationthantheelementontherightsideoftheframe.

ChangetotheleftsideviewF1_SIDE_L(clickChooseViewicon).

SelecttheF1_SIDE_LviewfromthedialogdisplayedandthenpressSet
View.Noticethatwhenthemodelregeneratesyouarenowintheleft
handview,butareunabletoseethememberontherightsideofthe
frame.Thisisbecausetheclippingplanedistancefortheleftframeviewis
setto450mmandthememberlocatedontherightsideoftheframeis
outsideofthisrange.

ChangetotherightsideviewF1_SIDE_R(clickChooseViewicon).

ThenselecttheF1_SIDE_RviewfromthedialogandthenpressSetView.
Noticethatthememberontheleftsideoftheframeisnotvisible.Once
againthisisbecausethelefthandmemberisoutsideoftheclipping
distancesetfortherighthandview.

51

Viewing and Moving Around the Model


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Lesson 2: Understanding and Manipulating Clipping Planes

Exercise:TogglingClippingPlanesOnandOff

Inthisexerciseyouwilllearnhowtotogglethestateoftheclippingplanesusing
theFlipcommand.

ChangetotheleftsideviewF1_SIDE_L(clickChooseViewicon).

SelecttheF1_SIDE_LviewfromthedialogdisplayedandthenpressSet
View.Noticethatthememberslocatedontherightsideofthemodelare
notvisible.

ToggletheclippingplanesOFF(ProSteelV8iMenu>Zoom/Views>
Clipplane>Flip)orclickClipPlanesFlipicon.

Noticehowtheclippingplanesaredeactivatedandthemembersonthe
rightsideofthemodelarenowvisible.

RepeattheFlipcommandseveraltimesnotingthechangeintheviewof
themodel.

Exercise:ChangingClippingPlaneDistances

Inthisexerciseyouwilllearnhowtochangetheclipplanedistancesothateven
thoughtheclipplanesarestillON,theviewinthemodelwillchangetoshow
membersthatwereoriginallyoutsideoftheclippingplanes.
1

ChangetotheleftsideviewF1_SIDE_L(clickChooseViewicon).

SelecttheF1_SIDE_LviewfromthedialogdisplayedandthenpressSet
View.

Changetheclippingplanessothattheviewdisplaysthememberslocated
ontherightsideofthemodel(ProSteelV8iMenu>Zoom/Views>
Clipplane>Distance)orclickClipPlanesDistanceicon.

OnexecutingtheClipplanedistancecommand,the"CurrentClipping
PlaneDistances"dialogisinvoked.Enteravalueof2500fortheBack
Distanceandkeepfrontdistancesetto450andpressOK.Notethatthe
viewnowshowsthecolumninthemiddleofthemodel.

Note:YouwilllearnlaterhowtosettheclipplanesatthetimetheWorkframe

isgenerated.

Viewing and Moving Around the Model

52

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ModuleReview

ModuleReview
Nowthatyouhavecompletedthismodule,let'smeasurewhatyouhavelearned.

Questions

Mar-12

HowdoIsetapredefinedISOView?

WhenIappliedapredefinedfrontview,whycan'tIseesomeofthe
members?

HowdoIsetanACSwithoutchangingthemodel'sview?

53

Viewing and Moving Around the Model


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Module Review

Answers
1

HowdoIsetapredefinedISOView?
ClicktheIsometricOverviewicon

WhenIappliedapredefinedfrontview,whycan'tIseesomeofthe
members?
ClipPlaneshavebeenset,andtheClipplanestogglebuttonison.

HowdoIsetanACSwithoutchangingthemodel'sview?
ClicktheObjectACScenteredicon.

Viewing and Moving Around the Model

54

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DrawingandEditingShapes
andWorkframes
ModuleOverview
Inthischapter,youwilllearnaboutProSteel'sHandleeditfunctionusedtoedit
andmanipulatesteelshapesandplatesandotherelements.
Therearethreelessonsinthischapter.Eachlessonbeginswithalistofobjectives
thatdefinetheinformationthatyouwilllearninthatlesson.Anumberof
Exercisesareprovidedineachlessonthataredesignedtoteachyouthetopics
listedintheObjectivessectionatthestartofeachlesson.

ModulePrerequisites

BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationetc.

Previousexperiencewitha3DCADsystem,preferablyMicroStationV8i

Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended

ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:

Mar-12

ActivatethehandlesandinvoketheProSteelProperties(ProSteelProperties)
function

Changevariousshapepropertiessuchassize,typeandlength

Modifystructuralobjectssuchasworkframes

DrawSteelShapesinthemodel

Editsteelshapesandplates

55

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Introductory Knowledge

IntroductoryKnowledge
Beforeyoubeginthismodule,let'sdefinewhatyoualreadyknow.

Questions
1

WhatareEditHandles?

WhentheEditHandlesaren'tdisplayingwhenyouclickonanelement,
youjusthavetosettheViewattributeforthem.TrueorFalse?

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes

56

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

IntroductoryKnowledge

Answers
1

WhatareEditHandles?
EditHandles(or"handles")areuseddynamicallymodifyormanipulate
elements.Theygenerallyappearascolouredsquaresonelementsthatcan
beadjusted.

WhentheEditHandlesaren'tdisplayingwhenyouclickonanelement,
youjusthavetosettheViewattributeforthem.TrueorFalse?
False.Iftheyaren'tdisplaying,youmustenabletheirdisplayonthe
ElementSelectionDialog.

Mar-12

57

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Handle Editing

HandleEditing
Inthislesson,youwilluseMicroStationhandlestoeditsteelshapesinorderto
changesize,length,shape,typeanddisplayoptions.Youwillalsousehandlesto
editProSteelObjects.

Exercise:EditingaShape'sProperties

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtoactivateacomponent'shandlesand
subsequentlydisplaytheShapePropertiesdialog.Thisdialogenablesyouto
modifythepropertiesthatdefineashape.
1

OpentheBASICS_01.DGNtrainingmodel(Filemenu>Open).

Browsetothetrainingfiledirectory.SelecttheBASICS_01.DGNfileand
pressOpen.

OpentheShapePropertiesdialog.

ZoominonthewideflangebeamlabelledUC203x203x46.Usingtheleft
mousebutton,picktheelementtoinvokeitsMicroStationhandles(which
shouldappearasbluesquares).

Withthehandlesoftheelementstillhighlighted,rightclickandselectPS
3DPropertiesfromthecontextmenu.

TheShapePropertiesdialogwilldisplayasshownbelow.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes

58

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

HandleEditing

Abriefdescriptionoftheshapepropertytabsettingsisprovidedbelow.

Mar-12

LayoutTab:containsthedisplayoptionsfortheshape.

ShapeTypeTab:containstheshapetype,class,andsizeoftheshape.

PositionTab:containsinformationrelatingtoshape'sinsertionpoint
andorientation.

AnalysisViewTab:AnalysisEffectiveCenterlinesareaparallelviewof
theCADmodelusedforstructuralanalysis.Thistabdefinesendpoints
oftheselinesandwhethertheyareautomaticoruserdefined.

DataTab:containspartslistdata.

ValuesTab:containsdimensionalandweightinformation.

CutsTab:containsinformationwithregardtocutsontheshape.

LoglinksTab:containsthesettingforlinksbetweenelements.

ConicalTab:containsdatapertainingtotheslopeofashapeplacedin
thedrawing.

AssignmentsTab:containsdatafordetailingthepartanddisplaying
thepartinrelationtothemodelandothershapesinthemodel.

Changetheshapesize:selecttheShapeTypetabontheShapeProperties
dialog.SelectUB203x133x25fromtheShapeSizedropdown.Noticethe
changeoftheshapeinthemodel.

ProSteeluses"nonmodal"dialogs.Thisisamajorbenefitwheneditinga
shapeorotherobjectasthechangesmadeinthedialogareimmediately
reflectedintheactualmodel.

59

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Handle Editing

SwitchtotheLayouttabandlocatetheLayoutgroupboxintheupperleft
handcornerofthedialog.Movethedialogofftothesidesoyoucansee
theshapebeingedited.

CyclethroughthevariousdisplaymethodsintheLayoutDropDownand
notethechangesintheshapeandhowitchangesinthemodel.Return
thedisplaytotheEdgeInsidemode.

10 IntheOptionsgroupboxontherighthandsideoftheLayouttab,

experimentwiththedisplayoptionsoftheshapeandnotethechangesin
themodel.DisablethePartLabeloptionandnoticehowthepartname
associatedwiththeshapeisnolongerdisplayedinthemodel.
11 SwitchbacktotheShapeTypetabandselecttheShapeClassdropdown

andchangetheshapetoaBS_EQUALshape.IntheShapeSizedropdown
scrollthroughthelistandchangethesizetoanEA70x70x8angle.Notice
thechangeinthemodel.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes

60

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

HandleEditing

12 Finally,switchtotheValuestabandchangethevalueintheLengthfieldto

3250.Noticethechangeinlengthoftheshape.

13 Returnthevaluestotheiroriginalsettingsandclosethedialog.
Note: ModificationwithmoreprecisionandinrelationtootherProSteelobjectswill

becoveredinmoredepthintheCreatingaWorkframemoduleofthiscourse.

Mar-12

61

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Drawing Steel Shapes in the Model

DrawingSteelShapesintheModel
ThissectionprovidesanoverviewoftheProSteelV8iShapesdialog.Youwillalso
learnhowtocreateasteelShapestemplatetominimizetheshapeselection.
Thereareseveralmethodsofinsertingshapesintoamodel,includinginsertion
viaalineinthemodel,picking2pointsinthemodel,andtheselectionofmultiple
lines.Youcanalsoinsertashapeinacrosssection,wheretheshapeisdrawnin
thenegativeZAxisfromthecurrentXYplane.
ThetwomostcommonmethodsofinsertingshapesaretheLinemethodandthe
2Pointmethod.Forourtrainingpurposeswefocusonthesemethods.

Exercise:CreatingatemplatefiletominimizetheShapetables

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtocreateatemplatefileoftheBSsteelshapes.
1

OpentheTRNMODEL.DGNfile.

Changetothestandardisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).

YouwillbeginbyinsertingthecolumnsontheFR1workframe(click
Shapesicon).

Beforeyouplaceashapeyouneedtominimizethenumberofshapetypes
displayedwithinthedialog.Todothis,createatemplatefileandsavethis
sothatyoucanrecallitlater.

FromtheProSteelShapesdialog,presstheDisplaybutton.
AsyoucanseetheShapesCatalogshownbelowisdividedintothreemain
sections.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes

62

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DrawingSteelShapesintheModel

Thelistofshapetablesshippedwiththeproductisshownonthefarleft
andthelistofavailableshapesforeachtableisdisplayedinthecenter.
TheCurrentShapeClassessectionontherightcontainsonlytheshapes
youwanttoseewhenyouinvoketheShapesInsertcommand.

Mar-12

AltertheCurrentShapeClassestoshowonlytheBSIBritishsteelshapes
andhavethemdisplayinMetricunits.Tobegin,pressthe<<buttonto
removealltheshapesfromtheCurrentShapeClassessection.

Next,disablealloftheoptionsinthecatalogsectionexceptfortheBSI
British.TheListofAvailableShapestotherightwillreflectthechange.

Nowpressthe>>buttontoaddalloftheshapesintheListofAvailable
ShapessectiontotheCurrentShapeClasseslist.

Fromthecentreofthedialog,selecttheMetricradiobutton.Thedialog
shouldnowappearasshownbelow.

63

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Drawing Steel Shapes in the Model

10 Tosavethenewsettings,picktheTemplatebutton.WhentheProSteel

TemplateManagerdialogappears,createanewfoldernamed"TRAIN",
thenaddatemplatetothefoldernamed"Metric".Thedialogshould
appearasshownbelow.
11 PressEntertoreturntothepreviousdialogandpressOKtoreturntothe

Steelshapeinsertiondialog.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes

64

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DrawingSteelShapesintheModel

Exercise:TheProSteelShapesDialog
1

OpentheBASICS_01.DGNfile.

OpentheProSteelV8iShapesdialog(ProSteelV8imenu>Shapesorclick
Shapesicon)andclickontheStraightShapestabifitisnotopen.

Theshapeselectiondialogcontainsthreetabsasshownintheabovefigure.
Togethertheycontroltheshapetypeandsizeaswellasitsorientation,length,
offset,materialandmethodofinsertion.TheoptionsprovidedintheStraight
Shapesdialogaredescribedinthefollowingtable.

Mar-12

Field

Description

ShapeType

Showstheshapetablesavailablefortheuseinthemodel.Theoptions
displayedinthisdependonwhichselection(Standardshapes,Usershapes,
CombinationshapesandRoofandWallshapes)iscurrentinthedropdown
aboveit

Resolution

Listtheavailableshapedisplayresolutions

ShapeClass

ListtheshapesizesavailableforthecurrentlyselectedShapeType.Additionally,it
controlsthedisplaydirectlytotherightofthesizelist.

ShapeSize

ListtheshapesizesavailableforthecurrentlyselectedShapeClass.Onceaspecificsize
memberisselectedanimageofthatshapewillappearindicatingthepossibleinsertion
pointswiththeselectedinsertionpointhighlightedinRED.Alsoindicatedbytheimage
isthecurrentrotationoftheshapeaboutitsaxisofinsertion.

65

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Drawing Steel Shapes in the Model

Field

Description

Key

Displaysthecurrentshapethatwillbeinsertedifanyoneoftheinsertionmethodsat
thebottomofthedialogweretobeselected.Thisistheactualshapethatgetsinserted
andcanbedifferentthantheshapeshownintheShapeTypeandShapeSizesections
ofthedialog.

Material

Thematerialthatwillbeassignedtothismemberatthetimeofinsertion.

Layer

Providesadropdownlistofavailablelayersfortheelements.

PartFamily

Iffamilyclasseshavebeendefined,youcansetthemhere.Theselectionofthefamily
classcaninfluencethecolourofthepart.

DetailStyle

Ifdetailingstyleshavebeendefined,youcansetthemhere.

DisplayClass

Ifdisplayclasseshavebeendefined,youcansetthemhere.

AreaClass

Ifareaclasseshavebeendefined,youcansetthemhere.

Description

Ifgeneralpartsdescriptionshavebeendefined,youcansetthemhere.Theselectionof
thedescriptioncaninfluencethecolourandthelayer.

DeltaX

TheinsertionoffsetinXdirection.Thisfieldcanonlybeentered,ifyouhaveselected
theposition'Free'asinsertionpoint(thisisthebiggestdisplayedinsertionpoint).

DeltaY

TheinsertionoffsetinYdirection.Thisfieldcanonlybeentered,ifyouhaveselected
theposition'Free'asinsertionpoint(thisisthebiggestdisplayedinsertionpoint).

ItemNo.

Anitemnumbercanbeentereddirectlyhere.

Length

Specifythelengthoftheshape.Thisisimportantifyouwanttoinsertshapesinthe
crosssection.Inputsinthisfieldoverwritethelengthspecifiedbytheinsertionpoints.

Turn

Theshapewillberotatedaboutitsinsertionaxisthisvalue.

CreateGroup

Thisoptioncreatesagroupoutoftheshapeafterinsertion.
Clickthisbuttontoopenthefollowingdialogwhereallrelevantshapedataare
displayed.

Allinsertedshapesarestillconnectedwiththedialog,sothatsubsequent
modificationscanalsobetransferredtoalreadyinsertedshapes.
Ifyoudon'twantthisoption,youcaninterrupttheconnectionusingthisbutton.
However,theshapeisnotdeletedinthiscase.

SwapShape:Allinsertedshapes,whicharestillconnectedwiththedialog,aremirrored
alongtheirYaxis.Youwillobtainthisbyexchangingtheinsertionpoints.

MatchPropertiesofSelectedShapes

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes

66

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DrawingSteelShapesintheModel

Field

Description
Allowstheusertopickonelineandthensettheorientationoftheshapeaboutthat
line.

RotateShape:Theshapesareturnedeitherpositive(turnedleftinshapedirection)or
negative(turnedrightinshapedirection)aroundtheirinsertionpointusingtheentered
value.

Promptstheusertopickastartpointandendpointofashape.

Enablesyoutoinsertashapediagonallybetweentwopoints.

Promptstheusertopickastartpoint,anendpointandanaxisofrotationforthe
shape.

Allowsyoutoselectmultiplelines.Uponselectingthelinestheprogramwillplaceone
shapeoneachlinepicked.

Forthismethodofinsertion,theorientationoftheshapeisbasedonapointand
enteredanglevalue.Thelengthoftheshapeisassignedbasedinthevalueyouentered
intheLENGTHfieldofthedialog.Youwillbepromptedtopickapointfirstandthenwill
bepromptedtoenteranangle.
Youcanusethisoptionifyouhaveindicatedafixedshapelength.Youareprompted
foraninsertionpointandforanalignment.Thentheshapewillbeinsertedonthe
currentXYplaneoftheACSwiththecorrespondinglengthtotheback(intothedepth).

DisplaystheShapeCatalogdialogallowingyoutocustomizetheshapesthatare
displayedforselectionintheShapeClassessection.

DisplaystheShapeModificationdialogallowingyoutoaddbentorstraightsegments
toastraightoralreadybentshape.

Mar-12

67

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Drawing Steel Shapes in the Model

Field

Description
Enablestheinsertionofsecondarybeamsbetweentwoexistingmainbeams.

Enablesyoutoinsertmultiplesecondaryshapesbetweenprimaryshapes

Enablesinsertionofbeamsatgridlines.WithAltselectionisviapolygon,withControl
LinesinallLevelsareused,otherwiseonlytheonesatthecurrentACSPlane.

Enablesinsertionofcolumnsatselectedpoints.

Exercise:InsertingSteelShapesintothemodel

Inthisexercise,youwilllearntheLineand2Pointmethodsofinsertingshapes
intothemodel.
1

OpentheProSteelV8iShapesdialog(clickShapesicon).

OpentheStraightShapestabandsettheparametersasshowninthe
figurebelow.Makesuretopickthetopcentreinsertionpointinthe
imageoftheshape.ThiswillinserttheshapeattheTOScentrepoint.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes

68

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DrawingSteelShapesintheModel

Next,switchtotheOptionstabandsettheparametersasshownbelow.

Theoptionsprovidedinthisdialogaredescribedinthefollowingtable.

Mar-12

Name

Description

Height

SpecifyinsertionheightabovecurrentXYplane.

StartOffset

Specifyoffsetofshapefromstartpoint.

EndOffset

Specifyoffsetofshapefromendpoint.

Radius

Specifyarcradiusforbentshapescreatedfrompolyline.

69

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Drawing Steel Shapes in the Model

Name

Description

Scale

Specifyscaleof2Dshapes.

HorizontalOffset

Thedistanceoftheshapesifashapeclasshasbeenselectedpermittinganoffsetof
severalshapesinhorizontaldirection.

VerticalOffset

Thedistanceoftheshapesifashapeclasshasbeenselectedpermittinganoffsetof
severalshapesinverticaldirection.

AngularInsertion Listofavailableinsertionpointsforangle.DeterminestheinsertionpointifInsertwith
LengthunderAngleisselected.
InsertinXYPlane EnableinsertionofshapescurrentXYplane.
Orientate

Enableorientationofshapesduringinsertionusingrightmouseclick

Dynamic

Enablesdynamicinsertionofshapes.

InsertRefPoints

Enablereferencepointcreationfrominsertionpoints.

Insertas2D
Shape

Enable2dShapecreation.

CloseDialog

Enabledialogclosureaftershapeinsertion.

KeepLength

Enablepersistenceoflengthfieldafterdialogclosure.

SecondaryBeam

ConnectAECLines:EnablesconnectionofAEClinesofbeamswithAEClinesofmain
elements.
Cope:Enableadditionofcopetosecondarybeams.Ifselected,enablesyoutoselecta
copetemplatefromthedropdownlistbelow.
OpenstheStructuralCopedialogallowingyoutoeditacopestyle.

SwitchbacktotheStraightShapestabandplacetheshapeusingtheLine
insertionmethod.(PresstheLinebuttonnearthebottomofthedialog).
Theprompt:PickthedesiredPoint<Line>isdisplayed.

Pickthebackleftverticalframelineatcolumnlocation2A.
Theprompt:ClickLeftHandMouseButtontoRotatetheShapeinPosition
orEntertoAcceptisdisplayed.

Clicktheleftmousebuttonuntiltheshaperotatesintotheposition
shownbelow.Whentheshapeisinthecorrectposition,clicktheRight
mousebuttontoendtheinsertionoftheshape,andthenclicktheRight
mousebuttonagaintoendthecommand.

WhentheStructuralShapesdialogdisplays,pressOKtoclosethedialog.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes

70

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DrawingSteelShapesintheModel

InsertanothershapeusingtheLinemethod(clickShapesicon).

Definetheshapeasshownbelow.

10 SettheparametersintheOptionstabthesameasbeforeandinsertthe

shape(presstheLinebutton).
Theprompt:PicktheDesiredpoint<Line>willappear.
11 Pickthetoplinelocated2A.

Theprompt:ClickLeftHandMouseButtontoRotatetheShapeinPosition
orEntertoAcceptwillappear.
12 ClicktheLeftMouseButtontoRotatetheShapeinPositionorRight

MousetoAccept.
13 PresstheAcceptcurrentShapetopreventfurtherchangesbutton.This

willallowyoutoplaceadditionalshapesusingdifferentsettingsfromthis
dialogwithoutlosingthesettingsoftheshapejustplaced.

Mar-12

71

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Editing Steel Shapes and Plates

EditingSteelShapesandPlates
Inthissection,wearegoingtohaveacloselookatsomeofProSteelV8i
modificationtools.
Shapesandplatescanbelengthened,shortened,coped,notched,divided,
joined,anglecutandhaveBooleanoperationsperformedonthem.Thereare
severalmethodsavailabletomodifyshapesandplatesotherthanbyHandle
editing.ManipulationcommandsareavailableinthemainStructuralModify
ElementdialogthatisaccessedthroughtheManipulatemenuitem.ProSteelV8i
Manipulatedialog(ProSteelV8imenu>Manipulate)orclickModifyicon.
ThissectioncoverstheElementModificationdialog.

Exercise:TheElementModificationDialog
1

OpentheElementModificationdialogshownbelow(ProSteelV8imenu>
Manipulate)orclickModifyicon.

Note:Eachtimethatyouseethisicon

inadialog,youhavetheoption

todisplayaBitmap(Graphics).
However,settingtheGlobalDialogSettingstoExpertModewillnot
showBitmap(Graphics).
Thisdialogisdividedintosixfunctionaltabs.TheoptionsintheCommon
tabaredescribedinthefollowingtable.Inthenextexercise,youwill
executesomeofthesefunctionsontheshapesintheBASICS_01.DGN
model.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes

72

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

EditingSteelShapesandPlates

Extend/Trim(highlightedblock).Thefirsticonistocuttheshapeataline.
ThiscanbeaMicroStationlineaswellasanimaginarylinethatcanbe
createdonflybyenteringtheletter"P"whenpromptedtopicktheline
uponwhichtocut.WhenyouenteravalueintheDistancefieldinthe
maindialogtheshapewillbegappedfromthelinethisamount.
ToExtendtoaLine,insertashapeintothedrawinganddrawalineacross
itspathafewfeetaway.Selecttheicontoextend/trimtoline.Atthis
pointitisnecessarytoselecttheshapeandoncethatisdone,holddown
the[Alt]keyandselectthelinetheelementshouldbeextendedto.
ToTrimtoaLine,begininthesamemannerasabovebyplacingashapein
thedrawing,thistimehowevercreateacrossinglinethatintersectsthe
shape.Selecttheicontoextend/trimtoline.Totrimtoalinesimplyselect
theobjectonthesidethatshouldberemovedthenselectthelineitself.
Thesecondiconistocutorextendedatanothershape.Inorderforthe
cuttotakeplace,thecenterlineoftheobjecttobecutmustintersect
somepartoftheshapeuponwhichyouarecuttingbackto.Whenyou
enteravalueintheDistancefieldinthemaindialogtheshapewillbe
gappedfromthecuttingelementthisamount.
TheDistancetextboxletsyouenteranoffsettothecuttinglineorcutting
element.
CreatesStraightCut:turnonthischeckboxtocreateastraightcutata
lineorobject,nomatterhowthesearepositionedtothecutobject.
ToExtendtoObject:Extendingtoaobject/shapesisfairly
straightforward.Placetwoshapesinthedrawing;acolumn,andabeam
goingtowardsthecolumn'sflange.Leaveaspacebetweenthem.Select
theicontoextend/trimtoshape.Thenselecttheshapetobeextended
(beam)andthenselecttheshapetoextendto(column).Notethatthe

Mar-12

73

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Editing Steel Shapes and Plates

elementwillextendtothepointwhereitscenterlinetouchestheobjectit
isextendingto.
ToTrimtoObject:Forthisexamplerecreatethesamegeometrybetween
twoobject/shapesasabovebutthistimehavethebeamcrosspastthe
column.Cuttoshapeisdonebyfirstselectingtheshapethatistobecut
andthenchoosingtheshapeitwillcutagainst.Heretheshortersideis
alwaysremovedandasmentionedabove,theelementwillextendtothe
pointwhereitscenterlinetouchestheobjectitisextendingto.

Divide/Connect(highlightedblock).Thefirsticon,Divide,isusedtodivide
ashapeintotwoshapes.Thecuttinglinemaybeanylineorobject.Pick
theshapetobedividedandthenthedividinglineorpoint.Whenyou
haveenteredavalueintheDistancefieldinthemaindialogBOTHnew
endswillbeshortenedthisamount.
Distancetextfield:Distancebetweenelementsafterdivision.
SeparateonLevelcheckbox:Ifthisoptionhasbeenactivated,youare
askedforthreepoints,whichhavetoformaplane.Thepartsaredivided
alongthisplane.
ToDivide:Withdivideitispossibletotakeasingleshapeandbreakitinto
twocompletelyseparateelements.Todothis,placeashapeintothework
area.Nextchoosethedivideiconandselecttheshape.Oncetheshapeis
selecteditispossibletodivideiteitherbyselectingapoint(default)orby
selectingalinethatcrossestheshape.
Itisimportanttokeepinmindthatwhenselectingapointthatthe
divisionwillbemadefromthatpoint,perpendiculartotheshape.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes

74

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

EditingSteelShapesandPlates

ThesecondiconistheConnecticon.Thisfunctionallowstwoshapesof
thesametypetobejoinedasone.Theymustbeexactlyaligned.
Distancetextbox:Distancebetweenelementsafterdivision.
SeparateonLevelcheckbox:Ifthisoptionhasbeenactivated,youare
askedforthreepoints,whichhavetoformaplane.Thepartsaredivided
alongthisplane.

Notchicon:Usingthisfunction,youcaninsertsimplegeometricalshapes
ofoutletsandcountersunkpartsintoyourshapes.Youcancreatesquare,
wedgetype,andcircularshapesusingthedialogwhichdisplaysupon
selectingthisoption.
SquareNotch:Tousethisoptionsimplyselectthememberandthenthe
locationonthememberwherethenotchshouldbeplaced.
Oncethisisdone,filloutthevaluesforWidth,HeightandDepthand
selectthepositionofthenotchinaccordancewiththepointthatwas
selected.Ablue,yellowandredcrosshairwillindicatethepointthatwas
selected.
WedgeNotch:Wedgeworksthesamewaythat'Square'doesbutincludes
twonewoptions,'EdgeFrontEdgeBack'and'EdgeTopEdgeBottom'.
Thefirstoptioniswhethertheverticalflatsideshouldfacethe'front'or
'back'.Thisdeterminesthenotchesdirectioninrelationtothedirection
thatthememberisbeingdrawn.Forexampleifthememberisdrawnleft
torightthentheverticalflatsideforthe'front'isalwaystotheleftand
the'back'alwaystotheright.
Thesecondoptionis'top'or'bottom'edge.Thiswillplacethehorizontal
flatsidefacingwhicheverdirectionischosen.Againthisisrelatedtothe
waythememberhasbeendrawn.If,forexample,thebeamisplacedin

Mar-12

75

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Editing Steel Shapes and Plates

thedrawingupsidedown(rotated180degrees)the'edgebottom'would
placetheflatsideatthetopandthe'edgetop'wouldplacetheflatsideat
thebottom.
RadialNotch:TheradialnotchworksdifferentlythanSquareandWedge.
Ittakesintoaccounttheradius,length&angleofthecylinder.Italsohas
theoptiontousetheouterorinnerradius.
Position:Underthe'Position'tab,thenotchrotationcanbeadjusted
alonganyaxis.Herethereareoptionsforrotatingthenotchby+/90
degreesorifneededavaluecanbeenteredand+/Phicanbeusedto
rotatebythespecifiedamount.

Polycutssection:PressthePickbutton(firsticon),thenpicktheshapeto
becut.Next,pickthepointofthepolylinedefiningtheboundariesofthe
cut.TheComplete,OnlyUpperHalfandOnlyLowerHalfsettingsdecide
wheretoapplythecut.IfavalueisenteredintheGapfield,anoffsetfrom
thecutlinewillbemaintainedequaltothevalueenteredintheGapfield.
Polyline:PressthePolylinebutton(secondicon),thenpicktheshapeto
becut.Next,youpickthepolylinethatdefinestheboundariesofthecut.
InthiscasethepolylinemustbedrawnwithMicroStationandbedrawn
priortoinitiatingthepolycutcommand.TheComplete,OnlyUpperHalf
andOnlyLowerHalfsettingsdecidewheretoapplythecut.Ifavalueis
enteredintheGapfieldanoffsetfromthecutlinewillbemaintained
equaltothevalueenteredintheGapfield.
Subtract:Thisbuttonisusedtosubtractthevolumeofoneshapefrom
thevolumeofanother.PresstheSubtractbutton(thirdicon),thenpick
theshapetobecut,thentheshapetoactastheboundaryshape.The
Complete,OnlyUpperHalfandOnlyLowerHalfsettingsdecidewhereto

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes

76

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

EditingSteelShapesandPlates

applythecut.IfavalueisenteredintheGapfieldanoffsetfromthecut
linewillbemaintainedequaltothevalueenteredintheGapfield.
2

AfterreviewingtheoptionsoftheElementModificationdialog,press
Canceltoclose.

Exercise:UsingtheModifyFunctionsonSteelShapesandPlates

Inthissection,youwillusetheoptionsinProSteelElementModificationdialogto
modifysteelshapesandplates.
1

OpentheElementModificationdialog(ProSteelV8imenu>Manipulate).

ClickontheShapetab.YouwillshortenshapeUC152x152x23by300.Type
300intheDefaultfieldintheShortensectionofthedialogasshown
below.

ThetextbelowprovidesdescriptionsoftheoptionavailableintheShapes
tab.
ShortenShapes:therearethreeiconsinthissection.
ByPick:Allowsyoutoshortenashapebypickingthedistance.Initiatethe
commandandbeginbypickingtheshapetobeshortened.Pickastarting
pointthenanendpointoftheshorteningandtheshapeisshortenedby
thisdistance.
ByDimension:Allowsyoutoshortenashapebyadistanceequaltoaset
value.Picktheshapethen,whenprompted,typeinavalueandtheshape
isshortenedbythisamount.
ByDefault:Shortenstheshapeadistanceequaltothevalueenteredin
theDefaultfield.TypeavalueintheDefaultfieldandinitiatethe
command.Picktheshapetobeshortenedneartheendyouwantreduced

Mar-12

77

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Editing Steel Shapes and Plates

andtheshapewillautomaticallybeshortenedthisamount.Ifyou
continuetopickthesameelementtheshapewillcontinuetobe
shortenedthedefaultvalue.
LengthenShapes:therearethreeiconsinthissection:
ByPick:SameastheShortenShapesByPickexcepttheshapeis
lengthenedbythedistancepicked.
ByDimension:SameastheShortenShapesByDimensionexceptthe
shapeislengthenedbythedimensionentered.
ByDefault:SameastheShortenShapeByDefaultexcepttheshapeis
lengthenedbythedefaultvalue.
Cope/Notch:thereisoneiconinthissection:
Cope:Copesoneshapewhereitmeetsanothershape.Theshapesmust
intersect.Oncethecommandisinitiatedpicktheshapetobecoped
followedbytheshapeuponwhichtocut.Afterpickingtheshapes,a
dialogdisplaysgivingyouadditionaloptionscontrollingtheactualcope
distancesandparameters.
MitreCuts:therearethreeiconsinthissection:
AngleBisect:Thisfunctionallowsformiteringtwoshapesthatareofthe
samesizeandtype.AdditionallyyoucandefineaGapbetweenthetwo
miteredshapesbyenteringavalueintheGapfield.
OutsideEdge:Thisfunctionallowsformiteringtwoshapesthatmaynot
bethesamesizeandtype.AdditionallyyoucandefineaGapbetweenthe
twomiteredshapesbyenteringavalueintheGapfield
Insertbend:Performsamiterandreplacesthebevelededgewithashape
sectionwitharadiusasspecifiedintheRadiusfield.
3

PresstheByDefaultbutton.
Theprompt:PickShapeatEndtobeShortenedisdisplayed.

PicktheUC152x152x23shapenearitsleftend.Noticethattheshape
shortens.PressOKtoclosethedialogandendthecommand.

OpentheElementModificationdialog(ProSteelV8imenu>Manipulate).

AnglemitrethetwoUC152x152x23shapesthatareangledadjacentto
eachother.IntheMitreCutssectionofthedialog,presstheAngleBisect
button.
Theprompt:SelectFirstShapeforAngleCutisdisplayed.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes

78

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

EditingSteelShapesandPlates

PickoneofthetwoUC152x152x23shapesthatareangledadjacentto
eachother.
Theprompt:SelectSecondShapeforAngleCutisdisplayed.

PicktheotherUC152x152x23shapeandnotethemitrethatisappliedto
thetwoshapes.

PressOKtoclosethedialog.

10 OpentheElementModificationdialog(ProSteelV8imenu>Manipulate).
11 Nowyouwillcutoneshapebackfromanother.PresstheAtObjectbutton

intheExtendTrimsectionofthedialog.
Theprompt:SelectShapetoCutorESCformoreShapestoCutis
displayed.
12 SelecttheUC152x152x23shapethatteesintotheflangeofthe

UC152x152x23shape.
Theprompt:SelectShapeonWhichtoCutisdisplayed.
13 PicktheintersectingUC152x152x23shape.Noticethecutbackthatis

appliedtothebeam.
Takeafewminutestofamiliarizeyourselfwiththeothermanipulation
functions.

Mar-12

79

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Module Review

ModuleReview
Nowthatyouhavecompletedthismodule,let'smeasurewhatyouhavelearned.

Questions
1

WhatarethetwomostcommonwaystoPlaceShapesintotheDesign?

Whatfourwaysareusedtoshortenabeamorcolumn?

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes

80

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ModuleReview

Answers
1

WhatarethetwomostcommonwaystoPlaceShapesintotheDesign?
InsertShapeonaselectedline,orbytwopoints.

Mar-12

Whatfourwaysareusedtoshortenabeamorcolumn?

UseEditHandles

ChangetheLengthintheProSteelPropertiesoftheShape.

TrimtoaLine.

TrimtoanotherShape.

81

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Module Review

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes

82

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingaWorkframe
ModuleOverview
Inthischapter,youwilllearnhowtocreateProSteelV8iWorkframes,modify
them,andcreateaDisplayClassinwhichtoaddtheframes.
Therearefivelessonsinthischapter.Eachlessonbeginswithalistofobjectives
thatdefinetheinformationthatyouwilllearninthatlesson.Anumberof
exercisesareprovidedineachlesson.

ModulePrerequisites

BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationetc.

Previousexperiencewith3DCADsystempreferablyMicroStationV8i

Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended

ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:

Mar-12

CreateasymmetricalandanonsymmetricalWorkframe

EdittheWorkframetochangeitspropertiesanddimensionalsettings

CreateandmanipulateDisplayClassesandAreaClasses

AssignourWorkframetotheDisplayClassesandAreaClasses

CycletheDisplayClassestocontroltheviewinthemodel.

83
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Workframe

Introductory Knowledge

IntroductoryKnowledge
Beforeyoubeingthismodule,let'sdefinewhatyoualreadyknow.

Questions
1

Creating a Workframe

HowdoyousetanAuxiliaryCoordinateSystembacktoaglobaloriginand
baserotation?

TypeGO=0,0,0intheKeyinDialog

TypeACTIVEORIGINCENTREintheKeyinDialogandDatapoint

ReprojecttheGlobalOriginbysettingaGeographicCoordinateSystem

RightmouseclickontheACSDialogandresettoGlobal

WhywouldyouneedtoresettheAuxiliaryCoordinateSystem?

84

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

IntroductoryKnowledge

Answers
1

HowdoyousetanAuxiliaryCoordinateSystembacktoaglobaloriginand
baserotation?
RightmouseclickontheACSdialogandresettoGlobal

WhywouldyouneedtoresettheAuxiliaryCoordinateSystem?
IftheorientationoftheACSisatanoddangle,theworkframewillnotsit
flat;rather,itwillgooffatanincorrectangle.

Mar-12

85

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Workframe

Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

CreatingaWorkframeandReviewSettings
WestronglyrecommendtheuseofWorkframesasoftenaspossible,even
thoughitispossibletomodelacompletestructurewithoutusingone.The
Workframeisa3Dobjectmadeupoflinesintheformofsquare/rectangle,
cylinder/coneorpyramid.Itprovidestheuserwiththefollowing:

Routinglinesforsteelplacement.

Automaticclippedviews,for2Ddrawinggenerationandeasierviewing.

AstructurecanbemodeledwithoneorseveralWorkframes.

Exercise:CreatingtheSymmetricalWorkframe

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtocreateandeditaworkframe.
1

CreateanewdrawingusingthetemplatecreatedinChapter2andsetthe
viewtoIsometricOverview1.

DisplaytheProSteelV8iWorkframedialogandplaceaworkframe
(ProSteelV8imenu>StructuralObjects>Workframe)orclickWorkframe
icon.
Theprompt:SelectOriginofWorkframeorEnterforACSoriginis
displayed.

RightclicktoaccepttheACSorigin.
Theprompt:SpecifyXAxisforWorkframeorEnterforACSXAxisis
displayed.

RightclicktoaccepttheACSXAxis.
TheProSteelV8iWorkframedialogdisplaysasshownbelow.

Creating a Workframe

Setthesizeandnumberofdivisionsasshowninthedialogbelow.

86

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingaWorkframeandReviewSettings

NextswitchtotheViewstabandsettheparametersasshownbelow.

NowsettheparametersintheTextXandTextYtabsasshownbelow.

Mar-12

87

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Workframe

Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

SwitchtotheOptionstabandsetthevaluesasshownbelow.

Creating a Workframe

Finally,switchtotheBlockstabandsetthevaluesasshownbelow,then
pressOKtocreatetheworkframe.

88

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingaWorkframeandReviewSettings

Note: AcellinMicroStationistheequivalentofaBlockinAutoCAD.

Exercise:ViewinganexistingWorkframe'ssettings

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtoeditaworkframe'sdimensionalsettings.
1

SetthemodeltotheOverview1view(ClickIsometricOverviewIcon).
Zoomintothefrontleftcorneroftheworkframejustcreatedandpickthe
yellowcollaredAxisDescription.

OncetheMicroStationhandlesareactive,rightclicktoaccessthecontext
menu.

SelectthePS3DPropertiesoption.ThiswillopentheProSteelV8i
Workframedialog.Thisisthesamedialogusedtocreatetheworkframe.
Fromthisdialogyouareabletochangetheworkframe'slength,width,
height,numberofdivisions,gridsystem,gridsize,etc.

Mar-12

89

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Workframe

Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

Note: Oncesteelmembershavebeenplacedonaworkframeandtheworkframeis

modifiedtheshapesWILLNOTupdatetomatchthenewdimensionsofthe
workframe.

Leavetheworkframevaluesunchanged.PressOKtoreturntothemodel.
Ifthehandlesarestillactive,leftclicktwicetodeactivatethem.

ThedimensionalportionofaWorkframeiswhatisknownasa'Structural
Object'.Thisportionoftheworkframecontainsallofthedimensional
datanecessarytodefineitssizeandlocation.Inadditiontothe
dimensionaldatathereisspecificframedataassociatedwitheveryface
(top,left,right,front,backandallfacesinbetween)oftheworkframe.
Eachoneofthesefacesisindependentoftheothersandcanbemodified
separately.Theseindividualframesalsoconstitutetheframesections
thatareautomaticallyprocessedbythe2DDetailCenter.Inthenext
exerciseyouwillviewandmodifyoneoftheseframes.

Exercise:ViewingpropertiesofanExistingWorkframe

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtoview/editaworkframe'sproperties.
1

WiththemodelintheOverview1view,windowintothefrontleftcorner
oftheworkframeyoucreated.

Now,pickonthetopmagentacollaredframe.OncetheMicroStation
handlesareactive,rightclicktoaccesstheContextmenu.

BrowsethemenuandselectthePS3DPropertiesoption.Thiswillopen
theWorkframePropertiesdialog.Eachtabwithinthedialogallowsyouto
view/modifyvariouspropertiesoftheworkframeasshownbelow.

Creating a Workframe

90

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingaWorkframeandReviewSettings

Fromwithinthisdialogyoucanchangethedisplayofthisworkframe.You
havetheabilitytochangethename,sizeandspacingoftheworkframe
axis.Youcanalsosettheclipplanedistancesonthefrontandback(or
aboveandbelow)oftheworkframe.YoucanturnontheAreaNameas

Mar-12

91

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Workframe

Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

wellasrenamethecompleteframe,settheCameralocationandview
locationetc.
4

Creating a Workframe

LeavetheWorkframePropertiesunchangedandpressOKtoclosethe
dialog.

92

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingaWorkframeandReviewSettings

Exercise:CreatingaNonSymmetricalWorkframe

InthisexerciseyouwillusetheAxisDistancemethodtocreatethenon
symmetricalworkframeFR2.WhenusingAxisdistancesyouwillassigneachaxis
(Length,Width,Height)aseriesofdistancestoformtheframe.
1

SetthemodeltotheOverview1view(clickIsometricOverviewicon).

Addanotherworkframe(clickWorkframeicon).
Theprompt:SpecifyoriginofworkframeorrightmousebuttonforACS
displays.

PicklowerbackleftcornerofworkframeFR1.
Theprompt:SpecifyXaxisofWorkframeorEnterACSXaxisdisplays.

ClicktheRightMousebutton.

ClickontheLayouttabandmakesuretheWorkframeLayoutissetto
Rectangular.MakesuretheoptionsintheDimensionsandDivisions
sectionarealldisabled.

SettheLength,Width,andHeightvaluesasshownbelow.

Note:BoththeWidthandHeighthavemultiplevaluestoproduce2bayswide

and2levelshigh.

Mar-12

SwitchtotheViewstabandmakesureallothersettingsaresetasshown
below.

93

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Workframe

Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

Next,switchtotheTextXandTextYtabsofthedialogandsettheaxis
descriptionvaluestomatchthefiguresbelow.

Creating a Workframe

94

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingaWorkframeandReviewSettings

Finally,settheparametersintheOptionstabasshownbelow.

10 Whenthesettingsareasshownabove,pressOKtoclosethedialog.
11 YouwillalsoneedtomodifytheaxisdisplaysettingsinthepreviousFR1

workframe.SelecttheyellowworkframeofFR1usingthelefthandmouse
button,thenrightclickandselectthePS3DPropertiesfromthemenu
list.SelecttheTextXtabselecttheindividualSettingButton.

Bydoubleclickingontheaxis1and2therewillbean"X"placedinthe
Invisiblecolumn.

Mar-12

95

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Workframe

Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

12 SelectOK.
13 TofinalizetheWorkframe,youwilladdadditionalconstructionlinesfor

anawningfromgrid3betweencolumnsBandC.Zoomintothecornerof
theworkframeatB3.
14 SetCurrentLeveltoPS_WORKFRAME.
15 SettheACStofrontview.
16 StarttheMicroStationLinecommand.

Theprompt:PickfirstpointIsdisplayed.
17 SelecttheintersectionpointofaxisB3level1

Theprompt:Specifynextpoint:Isdisplayed.
18 ChangeAccuDrawtoPolarandenter120fordistanceand10forangle,

thenenteradatapointtoaccept.
19 RepeatthestepsaboveforcolumnatC3.

Yourmodelshouldappearasbelow:

Creating a Workframe

96

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingaWorkframeandReviewSettings

Mar-12

97

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Workframe

Creating and Manipulating Display Classes, Area Classes and Part Families

CreatingandManipulatingDisplayClasses,AreaClassesand
PartFamilies
Inthissection,youwilllearnwhatDisplayClasses,AreaClassesandPartFamilies
areandhowtocreatethem.Additionallyyouwilllearnhowtoassignstructural
elementsandobjectstothemtomakeviewingthemodeleasierinthecaseof
complexmodels.

DisplayClasses
DisplayClassesareaProSteelV8itoolusedtoseparateamodelintoobject
visibilityclasses.
TheDisplayClassescommandallowsyoutoorganiseobjects(Shapesand
StructuralObjects)fromdifferentMicroStationlevelsintovisibilitygroupsthat
areindependentfromthelevelstheyresidein.Contraryto"freezing"levelsin
MicroStation,whichturnsoffthedisplayofthecompletelevel(resultingin
numerouslevelstocontroldisplay),DisplayClassesallowsyoutoselectentire
groupsorjustafewobjectsandmakethemvisibleorhidden.Thiswillhelp
simplifytheviewofthemodeldisplayedonthescreen.
Note: EachelementcanexistonlyinoneDisplayClassatatime.Thismeansthatit

willberemovedfromoneclassifitisassignedtoanother.

Exercise:CreatingDisplayClassesandAssigningObjectstothem.

Inthissection,youwilllearnhowtocreatedisplayclasses.Someofthedisplay
classesyoucreatewillbeusedlaterinthemodellingprocess.
1

Creating a Workframe

OpentheProSteelV8iDisplayClassesdialog(ProSteelmenu>Display
Classes>Dialog)orclickDisplayClassesicon.

98

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingandManipulatingDisplayClasses,AreaClassesandPartFamilies

YouneedtoassignnamestoourDisplayClasses.Inordertoassignaname
doubleclickononeoftheemptylistentriesandenteranameintheinput
field.ThefirstDisplayClasswillbenamed***markedmembers***.

AssignnamestoDisplayClasses,***markedmembers***,Beams,
Columns,Struts,WindBeams,WallStiffeners,StairStringers,Joist,
Purlins,Girts,etc,asshownbelow.

Mar-12

99

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Workframe

Creating and Manipulating Display Classes, Area Classes and Part Families

AreaClasses
InadditiontoDisplayClasses,ProSteelV8iincludesAreaClassfunctionalityto
organizeandcontrolthevisibilityofconstructionareas(workareas,construction
phases,builds,etc.).TheusercancreateAreaClasses,assignobjectstothose
classesandthencontrolthevisibilityoftheobjectsbyturningonorofftheArea
Classes.

Exercise:CreatingAreaClassesandAssigningObjectstothem

Inthissection,youwilllearnhowtocreateAreaClasses.SomeoftheArea
Classesyoucreatewillbeusedlaterinthemodellingprocess.
1

OpentheProSteelV8iAreaClassesdialog(ProSteelmenu>AreaClasses>
Dialog)orclickAreaClassesicon.

YouneedtoassignnamestoourAreaClasses.Inordertoassignaname
doubleclickononeoftheemptylistentriesandenteranameintheinput
field.ThefirstDisplayClasswillbenamedBEAM.

AssignnamestoAreaClasses,BEAM,COLUMN,JOIST,BRACING
VERTICAL,BRACINGGENERAL,etc,asshownbelow.

Creating a Workframe

100

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingandManipulatingDisplayClasses,AreaClassesandPartFamilies

PartFamilies
PartFamiliesareamechanismtoautomaticallyallocateprefixes,coloursand
DetailStylesduringthepositioningprocessbycategorizingdifferenttypesof
components(e.g.,columns,beams,gussetplates,etc.).2Dlinetypesandcolour
canalsobecontrolledthroughthePartFamilies.
PartFamiliesshouldbecreated,componentsassignedtotheseandthenthePart
Familyprefixshouldbeusedduringpositioning.
Note: EachcomponentcanbelongtoonlyonePartFamilyatatime.

Exercise:CreatingPartFamiliesandAssigningObjectstothem.

Inthissection,youwilllearnhowtocreatePartFamilies.Someofthedisplay
classesyoucreatewillbeusedlaterinthemodellingprocess.
1

Mar-12

OpentheProSteelV8iPartFamiliesdialog(ProSteelmenu>PartFamilies
>Dialog)orclickPartFamiliesicon.

101

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Workframe

Creating and Manipulating Display Classes, Area Classes and Part Families

YouneedtoassignnamestoourPartFamilies.Inordertoassignaname
doubleclickononeoftheemptylistentriesandenteranameintheinput
field.Anewdialogwillappear,enterDescription,PosPrefixandColour.

AssignnamestoPartFamilies,BEAM,COLUMN,JOIST,BRACING
VERTICAL,BRACINGGENERAL,etc,asshownbelow.

Creating a Workframe

102

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingandManipulatingDisplayClasses,AreaClassesandPartFamilies

Mar-12

103

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Workframe

North Direction

NorthDirection
TheBenchmarkisasymbol/markerthatcanbeinsertedintothe3Dmodelto
specify/controlthenorthdirectionforerectionpurpose.

Exercise:CreatingNorthDirection.

Inthissection,youwilllearnhowtocreateaNorthDirection.
1

Toinsertabenchmarkintothe3Dmodel,clicktheBenchmarkicononthe
ProSteelV8iUtilitiestoolbar,thenspecifyanorigin/pointandanorth
direction,thedialogshownbelowwillappear.

Creating a Workframe

104

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

NorthDirection

Mar-12

105

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Workframe

North Direction

UserDefinedPartDescription
ProSteelV8iprovidesamechanismtoassignuserdefinablepart/shape
descriptionsthatcanbeusedduringthecreationandeditingofparts(e.g.,
specifyinglevel,colourandlinestylelinestyle),searchingandorganizingand
filteringthedisplayofpartsduring2Ddrawingproduction.
ToassignaDescriptiontoashape,selectashapeintheV8imodel,rightclickand
selectPS3DPropertiesfromthecontextmenu.TheShapePropertiesdialogwill
appear.
FromtheDescriptiondropdownintheAssignmenttab,selectanypredefined
description.

Creating a Workframe

106

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

NorthDirection

Thetextfile(..\LOCALISED\ENGLISH\DATA\PRO_ST3D.FDF)controlsthisdrop
downlist.Itcontainssomepredefineddescriptionsbutismodifiablebytheuser
withthehelpofatexteditorsuchasMicrosoftNotepad.
ThePRO_ST3D.FDFdatacontentisarrangedasfollows:
Index,description[,layername,layercolor,layerlinetype][,colornormal,linetype
normal,colourhidden,linetypehidden]
Where"normal"arevisiblelineson2Ddetailsand"hidden"arehiddenlineson
2Ddetails.

UserDefinedtemplates
Templatesallowuserstosaveallvaluesrelatedtoadialog(includingalltabs)toa
userdefinedtemplatenameandthenreusethevaluesbyloadingthetemplate.
Thisfunctionalitysavestimeandallowssettingstobesharedbetweenco
workersandstandardisedwithinprojects.
Eachtypeoffunctionhasadedicatedfiletowhichuserdefinedtemplatesare
saved.TemplatefilesaregroupedintotheVariafolderundertwoseparate
subfolders:MetricandImperial.
TemplatescanbecreatedthroughmostProSteelV8idialogs.

Mar-12

107

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Workframe

North Direction

Tocreateortoload/importatemplateclickonTemplate
TemplateManagerdialogwillappear.

.TheProSteelV8i

Tocreateanewtemplateinanewfolder,dothefollowing:

ClickonNewFolder

.Anewfolderisaddedwiththename"NewFolder".

Typeanewnameforthefolder(e.g.,."FirstFolder").

Clickonceoutsidethenamefield,thenclickonSaveTemplateAs.
Anew
templateisaddedwiththename"Template".Typeanewnameforthe
template(eg,"FirstTemplate").Thissavesthefields/settingsinthedialogto
thecorrespondingtemplatelistedabove.

Toloadatemplate,clickonTemplate.TheProSteelV8iTemplateManagerdialog
willappear.SelectatemplatefromthelistoftemplatesandclickonLoad
Template
.
Thiswillpopulateallfields/settingsinthedialogfromthetemplate.

Toimportatemplate,clickonTemplate.TheProSteelV8iTemplateManager
andthefilebrowserwillappear.Selectan
dialogwillappear.ClickonImport
existingtemplateandclickonOpen.
TheexistingtemplatewillbeloadedintotheProSteelV8iTemplateManager
dialog.

Creating a Workframe

108

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ModuleReview

ModuleReview
Nowthatyouhavecompletedthismodule,let'smeasurewhatyouhavelearned.

Questions

Mar-12

WhatistheadvantageofusingaWorkframe?

WhydoweuseaPartDescription?

WhatdoesaProSteeltemplatesave?

Whatistheprocesstocreateatemplate?

109

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Workframe

Module Review

Answers
1

WhatistheadvantageofusingaWorkframe?
TheworkframecanmaketheplacingofSteeldirectlyontothelines
easier.Ifsettodoso,itcanalsoautomaticallycreateviewsthatyoucan
rotatetowhichhavefrontandbackclippingplanesalreadydefined.

WhydoweuseaPartDescription?
ThemainuseofPartDescriptionsistoenablethesettingofaPosition
Prefixforelements.

WhatdoesaProSteeltemplatesave?
AllofthesettingsonaProSteelDialog.

Whatistheprocesstocreateatemplate?
ClicktheTemplatebutton,createafolder,thencreatethetemplate.

Creating a Workframe

110

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

InsertingandManipulating
Shapes
ModuleOverview
Inthischapter,youwilllearnhowtoinsertsteelintoaWorkframeusingtheLine
and2Pointmethods.Afterinsertionyouwilleditthesteelfurthersoyoucan
detailthejointsinlaterchapters.

ModulePrerequisites

BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationetc.

Previousexperiencewith3DCADsystempreferablyMicroStationV8i

Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended

ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:

Mar-12

InsertsteelShapesonaworkframe

AssignmemberstoaDisplayClass

Insertshapesinamodelusingthe2Pointmethod

111
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes

Introductory Knowledge

IntroductoryKnowledge
Beforeyoubeginthismodule,let'sdefinewhatyoualreadyknow.

Questions
1

HowdoyourotatethemodeltoastandardProSteelIsometricview?

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes

112

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

IntroductoryKnowledge

Answers
1

HowdoyourotatethemodeltoastandardProSteelIsometricview?
OntheProSteelZoom/Viewsmenu,choosetheappropriateIsometric
Overviewfromthefivepredefinedoptions.

Mar-12

113

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes

Inserting Steel Shapes Using the Line

InsertingSteelShapesUsingtheLine
InthissectionyouwillcreateaSteelShapestemplatetominimizetheshape
selection.ThenyouwilllearnhowtoinsertsteelShapesonaworkframe.

Exercise:InsertingSteelShapesUsingtheLineMethod

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtoinsertsteelshapesonourworkframeusing
theLinemethod.
1

FromwithintheProSteelShapesdialog,settheShapeClasstoBSUBand
theShapeSizetoUB305x165x46.Settheinsertionpointtothe"centreof
steel"bypickingthenodeonthecentreoftheshapeimage.

ClickontheOptionstabandmakesuretheOrientateafterinsertion
optionisenabled.

PresstheInsertshapeonSelectedLinebutton.
Theprompt:PickthedesiredPoint<Line>displays.

SelecttheverticallineoftheworkframelocatedatgridcoordinateA1in
theworkframeFR1.
Theprompt:Clicklefthandmousebuttontorotatetheshapeinposition
orentertoacceptdisplays.

Clicktheleftmousebuttontoturntheshapeinthedirectionshown
below.

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes

114

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

InsertingSteelShapesUsingtheLine

Whentheshapeisorientatedcorrectly,rightclicktwicetoendthe
commandandreturntothedialog.

PresstheOKbuttontoclosetheProSteelShapesdialog.

Repeatthiscommandandinsertthesametypeandsizeshape
(UB305x165x46)atgridlineA2.Atallremainingverticalgridlines,insert
UB305x165x46shapes.

Hint:WhenselectingtheverticalgridlinesinFrameFR2,besuretopickthe

verticalgridlinesnearthetopoftheframesoasnottoselecttheFR1
gridlines.
9

Mar-12

Next,returntotheProSteelShapesdialog.KeeptheShapeClassasBSUB,
andsetthesizetoUB533x210x101.UsingtheLinemethod,insertand
orientthebeamsonthehorizontallinesasshowninthefollowingfigure.
Makesurethatthebeamsareinsertedusingthetopcenter"TOS"
insertionpoint.

115

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes

Inserting Steel Shapes Using the Line

Yourmodelshouldappearasshownbelow.

Exercise:ModifyingSteelMemberswiththeDivideCommand

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtodivideasteelshapebydividingitinto
multipleshapesatcolumnintersections.
Nowthatyouhavesomeelementsinsertedinyourmodelyouwillneedtodivide
someofthesewheretheyintersectacolumn.Todothisyouwillusethe
ManipulateandDividecommands.

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes

116

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

InsertingSteelShapesUsingtheLine

OpentheElementModificationdialog(clickModifyicon).

PresstheDividebuttonintheCommontab.

Whenpromptedtoselecttheshapestobedivided,choosethe
UB533x210x101beamlocatedbetweencoordinatesB1toB3.Rightclick
toaccepttheselections.

Whenpromptedtopickthedividingpointorline,orwhenpromptedto
pickasnappoint,choosethecolumnlocatedatcoordinateB2.
Thesnapwilllocateapointonthecentroidaxistouseasthedividing
point.

Mar-12

PressOKtocompletethecommand.

RepeatthesameprocessfortheUB533x210x101beamcoordinatesC1to
C3.

ZoomintooneoftheUB533x210x101shapesattheintersectionwiththe
columnsandnotethattheelementisnowdividedintotwopieces.

117

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes

Assigning Steel Members to a Display Class

AssigningSteelMemberstoaDisplayClass

Exercise:AssigningShapestoaDisplayClassUsingtheDisplayClassDialog

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtoplaceshapesintoadisplayclassusingthe
DisplayClassdialogAssignfeature.
1

OpentheDisplayClassesdialog(ProSteelmenu>DisplayClasses>
Dialog)orclickDisplayClassesicon.

Note:IftherearenoAssignedClassesinthedialog,youcaneditthecontent

ofthefieldClassNamebydoubleclickingit.
2

SelecttheColumnsClasstomakeitactive,thenpresstheAssignbutton.
Theprompt:SelectobjectsyouwishtoaddtotheDisplayClassdisplays.

Pickallofthecolumnswithinthemodelandthenrightclicktoreturnto
theDisplayClassesdialog.

TurnoffColumnsClasstoremovethemfromthedisplay.Thismakesit
easiertobeabletoselecttheotheritems.

SelecttheBeamsClasstomakeitactivethenpresstheAssignbutton.
Theprompt:SelectobjectsyouwishtoaddtotheDisplayClassdisplays.

ChooseallbeamsexcepttwobeamslocatedbetweenC1,C2,andC3.
RightclicktoreturntotheDisplayClassesdialog.

PressOKintheDisplayClassdialogtoreturntothemodel.

Exercise:AssigningShapestoaDisplayClassUsingEditing
1

SelectthetwoUB533x210x101beamslocatedalongC1andC2to
highlightthem.RightclicktoaccesstheProSteelProperties.

WhentheShapePropertiesdialogappears,switchtotheAssignments
tab.

NexttotheDisplayClasspickbox,selectthedropdownarrowand,from
thelistofavailabledisplayclasses,selecttheBeamsdisplayclass.Select
OKtoreturntothemodel.

Addtheremainingshapestotherespectivedisplayclassinthesame
manner(i.e.beamslocatedalongC2andC3).

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes

118

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

InsertingSteelShapesUsingthe2PointMethod

InsertingSteelShapesUsingthe2PointMethod
Theobjectiveofthislessonisasfollows:

Learnhowtoinsertshapesinamodelusingthe2Pointmethod.

Exercise:InsertingSteelshapesUsingthe2PointMethod
1

OpentheProSteelShapesdialog(clickShapesicon).

FromwithintheStructuralShapesdialog,settheShapeTypetobeBSUB
andtheShapeSizetoUB406x140x39.

Settheinsertionpointtothe"topcenterofsteel"bypickingthenodeon
thecenterofthetopflangeontheshapeimage.

ClickontheOptionstabtomakesuretheOrientateafterinsertionoption
isenabled.

Selectthe2Pointmethodofinsertionandzoominontheintersectionof
thecolumnatcoordinateB2andtheexistingbeams.

Whenpromptedtoselecttheinsertionpointoftheshape,choosethe
midpointoftheupperflangeoftheintersectingbeam(runningalongAxis
B)atB2Level2.

Forthesecondendinsertionpoint,zoomtothecolumnatcoordinateC2
choosethemidpointoftheupperflangeoftheintersectingbeam
(runningalongAxisC).

Rightclicktoaccepttherotationoftheshape.

Rightclickagaintoreturntothedialog,thenpressOKtoendthe
command.
Yourmodelshouldnowappearasinthediagrambelow.

Mar-12

119

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes

Inserting Steel Shapes Using the 2 Point Method

Exercise:InsertingRemainingSteelshapes
1

Addtheawningbeams,suchasBSUB152x152x37,fromcolumnsB3and
C3,usingthepreviouslydrawnconstructionlines.

Assignthesebeamstotheirrespectivedisplayclasses.

Saveyourmodel.
Yourmodelshouldnowappearasshownbelow.

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes

120

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

InsertingSteelShapesUsingthe2PointMethod

Mar-12

121

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes

Module Review

ModuleReview
Nowthatyouhavecompletedthismodule,let'smeasurewhatyouhavelearned.

Questions
1

WhattwomethodscanbeusedtoassignaDisplayClasstoasteel
member?

Answers
1

WhattwomethodscanbeusedtoassignaDisplayClasstoasteel
member?
YoucaneithersetitontheDisplayClassdialog,orsetitontheShape
Properties>Assignmentstab.

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes

122

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingConnectionsBetween
Elements
ModuleOverview
Thismoduledescribeshowtocreateconnectionsbetweenelements.Youwill
learnhowtocreateanduseEndPlateconnections.YouwillalsousetheBolting
commandtoaddboltstoEndPlateconnections.

ModulePrerequisites

BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationetc.

Previousexperiencewith3DCADsystempreferablyMicroStationV8i

Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended

ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:

Mar-12

CreateanEndPlateconnection

AddadditionaldesignfeaturestoanEndPlateconnection

UseeditingtomodifyanexistingEndPlateconnection

Manuallymodifyaconnectionandadd"common"boltstotwobacktoback
EndPlateconnections

123

Creating Connections Between Elements

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Introductory Knowledge

IntroductoryKnowledge
Beforeyoubeingthismodule,let'sdefinewhatyoualreadyknow.

Questions
1

Howdoyouspinyourviewtothetopviewofaparticularbeam?

HowdoyouspinyourviewtotheFrontviewofaparticularWorkframe?

Creating Connections Between Elements

124

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

IntroductoryKnowledge

Answers
1

Howdoyouspinyourviewtothetopviewofaparticularbeam?
OntheProSteelViewsmenuchoosetheappropriateIsometricRotation
fromthefivepredefinedoptionsOutline1toOutline5

HowdoyouspinyourviewtotheFrontviewofaparticularWorkframe?
OntheProSteelViewsmenuchoosetheappropriateIsometricRotation
fromthefivepredefinedoptionsOutline1toOutline5.

Mar-12

125

Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

CreatingaBasicEndPlateConnection

Exercise:CreatingaBasicEndPlateConnection

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtocreateabasicEndPlateconnection.
1

Ifnotalreadyloaded,opentheTRNMODEL.DGNdrawingfile.

Zoomtothestandardisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).

Youwillbeginbyzoomingintothejointbetweenthecolumn
UB305x165x46andBeamsUB533x210x101atcoordinateA1.

Placeanendplate(ProSteelMenu>Connections>EndPlates)orclick
Endplatesicon.
Theprompt:SelecttheShapetoConnectisdisplayed.

PicktheUB533x210x101memberrunningalongAxisA.
Theprompt:Selectsupportshapeor<RETURN>fornosupportshapeis
displayed.

Selectthecolumnthatthebeamistobeconnectedto.TheProSteel
Endplatesdialogwilldisplay.Settheparametersasshownbelowinthe
Layouttab:
Layout

SettheparametersintheHolestabasshownbelow:

Creating Connections Between Elements

126

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingaBasicEndPlateConnection

HoleDimensionsfromtopofendplate

SettheparametersintheConnecttab,asshownbelow:
Connect

SettheparametersintheGrouptab,asshownbelow:
Group

Mar-12

127

Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

10 SettheparametersintheAssignmenttab,asshownbelow,thenclickthe

greencheckmarktoplacetheendplate.
Assignment

11 Repeatthesameprocedureandplacethesameendplateontheopposite

endoftheUB533x210x101beam.
AdescriptionofthefieldswithinthedifferenttabsoftheProSteelEndplates
dialogisprovidedinthefollowingtables.

Name

Description

LayoutTabFieldsandDescriptions
LayoutofPlate

Thisoptionliststhefollowingconnectiontypestochoosefrom:
Automatic:Theprogrammakesthedistinctionbetweenaspliced/buttornormalplate
connection.Anangleofapprox.45isassumedtobethecriticalangle.
Splice:Theconnectionisalwaysaspliceconnection.
Normal:Theconnectionisalwaysanormalplateconnection.
Flange:Theconnectionhasaplateweldedtoitsflanges.

Creating Connections Between Elements

128

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingaBasicEndPlateConnection

Name

Description

PlateDimensions

Specifythebasicdimensionsoftheconnectingplate.
Width:meansthewidthoftheplate(incaseofIshapes:paralleltotheshapeflange).
Thickness:meansthethicknessoftheplate.
Length:meansafixedlengthoftheplateindependentoftheshapeheight.Enteringthe
value0forthelength,youcanentertheplatelengthvariablyintheOffsetTop/Offset
fieldsasdistancefromtheupperandloweredgeoftheselectedshape.
Gap:specifiesthatanindicatedspaceisleftbetweenthesupportingshapeandthe
plate.Thisallowsyoutoconsiderfinishingtolerances.
DoublePlate:meansthattwoconnectingplatesofthesamesizearecreated.

AsPolyplate

Selectifplatesarecreatedusingaflatsteelorpolyplates

Rotate
Connection

Rotatesconnectionupsidedown.

PlatesEqual

WhentheDoublePlatesoptionisenabled,thisforcesbothplatestobeidenticalin
form.
Pressthisbuttontoretrievethedimensionoftheplatefromashape.
Pressthisbuttontosetthedimensionsofthesecondplatetothoseofthefirstplate.

PlateOffset

Horizontal:meansthecompleteplateconnectionisshiftedparalleltotheflangeofthe
connectingshape.
Vertical:meansthecompleteplateconnectionisshiftedparalleltothewebofthe
connectingshape.

HolesTabFieldsandDescriptions
WithoutHoles

Mar-12

Theconnectingplateisenteredwithoutdrillholesifthisfieldisselected.

129

Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

Name

Description

Vertical

Thisallowsyoutodeterminethenumberofverticaldrillholesintheplate.
Asymmetrical:Ifthisfieldischecked,youcandeterminethedistancesoftheholes.
Otherwise,asymmetricaldistributionisdeterminedaccordingtothedefaults.
Number:Youdeterminethenumberofdrillholesinverticaldirection.Youcanselect
between1and10drillholes.
(VerticalHolePattern):Thedrillholespacinginaverticaldirection(height)is
determined.Dependingontheentry,thevalueshavedifferentmeanings.Examplesare
givenattheendofthecommanddescription.
Youcanenterthedistanceoftheupperrowofholesfromtheplate'supperedgeinthe
Upsidefield.Ifthisvalueis0,andthevalueintheboxDownsideisalso0,theonlyentry
thatwillbeusedisintheMiddlefield.
Youcanenterthedistanceofthefirstandsecondrowofholesfromtheupperand
lowerplateedgeintheMiddlefield.Theholeswillbedistributeduniformlybetween
thetwoouterholesifthisvalueis0.Theotherrowsofholeswillbearrangedinthe
samemannerifthenumberisgreaterthan4.
Youcanenterthedistanceofthelowestrowofholesfromtheplate'sloweredgeinthe
boxDownside.OnlytheentryintheMiddleboxwillbeusedifthevalueinthe
DownsideandUpsidefieldis0.Youcanenterasimultaneousshiftingofallrowsof
holeswithrespecttotheplateupperedgeintheOffsetfield.Shiftingwillbecarriedout
withrespecttotheplateloweredgewhenenteringnegativevalues.Ifyouhave
selectedtheAsymmetricaloption,thestructureoftheholepatterninputchangesand
alistwithaninputfieldappears.Dependingonthenumberofholes,youcan
determineeachdistanceindividuallybyclickingthepositioninthelistandbyspecifying
thedistanceintheinputfield.Additionally,youcandeterminewhetherthedistribution
startsfromupperorlowerplateedge,dependingonthecheckedfieldupperedgeor
loweredge.

Horizontal

Thisallowsyoutodeterminethenumberofhorizontaldrillholesintheplate.
Number:Youdeterminethenumberofdrillholesinhorizontaldirection(width)inthe
list.Youcanselect1,2,or4drillholes.Thus,1to40holepatternscanbecreated.
(HorizontalHolePattern):Thedrillholespacinginahorizontaldirection(width)is
definedhere.Examplesaregivenattheendofthecommanddescription.Thedistance
betweentheouterleftrowofholesandthecentralleftrowofholes,ifthenumberof
rowsis4,isenteredintheLeftfield.Thedistancebetweenthetwoinnerrowsofholes
isenteredintheMiddlefield.Therowsofholesaregenerallyarrangedcentrally,unless
theyareoffsetbyanentryintheOffsetfield.Thedistancebetweentheouterrightrow
ofholesandthecentralrightrowofholes,ifthenumberofrowsis4,isenteredinthe
Rightfield.Simultaneousshiftingofallrowsofholeswithrespecttotherightplate
edgeisenteredintheOffsetfield.Whenenteringnegativevalues,shiftingwillbe
carriedoutwithrespecttotheleftplateedge.

Measuredfrom

IftheAsymmetricaloptionisenabled,thisprovidesalistofoptionstodetermine
wheretheholeoffsetsaremeasured.TheavailableoptionsareUpperEdgePlate,
UpperEdgeShape,andLowerEdgeShape.

Creating Connections Between Elements

130

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingaBasicEndPlateConnection

Name

Description

ConnectTabFieldsandDescriptions
BoltSettings

TheBoltStyleallowsyoutoselectthetypeofbolts(e.g.,DIN558)tobeusedforthe
connection.TheEditStylebuttonnexttothisfielddisplaysadialogallowingyouto
createnewBoltstylesandeditexistingones.
YoucanentertheboltdiameterfortheconnectionintheDiafieldandtherequired
holediameteroftheboltedconnection,inmostcases+2mmintheWorkloosefield.

WeldSettings

TheWeldStyleallowsyoutoselectthetypeofweldtobeusedfortheconnection.The
EditStylebuttonnexttothisfielddisplaysadialogallowingyoutocreatenewweld
stylesandeditexistingones.
YoucanentertheweldingseamthicknessesbyenablingtheWeldFlangeSideWeld
WebSideoptionsandinenteringthethicknessinthecorrespondingfields.Welding
markscanbesubsequentlyassignedtotheweldingseams.

GroupTab
GroupandCope

IftheCreateGroupoptionisenabled,theplateandtheshapetobeconnectedare
arrangedtoformagroupinthisfield.Theplateisallocatedtoanothergroup,ifthe
shapeisalreadypartofthatgroup.Thesameappliestothesupportingshapeandthe
associatedstiffeners.
TheboltsorweldsfortheshapetobeconnectedarealsoassignedtothegroupinWith
BoltsorWithWeldsfields.

SafetyCopes

TopLeft:Leavesagapintheangleintheupperleftside.
TopRight:Leavesagapintheangleintheupperrightside.
BottomLeft:Leavesagapintheangleinthebottomleftside.
BottomRight:Leavesagapintheangleinthebottomrightside.

Exercise:CreatinganEndPlateConnectionwithanInherentGussetPlate

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtocreateanEndPlateconnectionwitha
gussetplateonthelowersurfaceofthebeam.
1

Toplaceaconnectionplate,first,zoomtotheintersectionofthethree
UB533x210x101beamswiththeUB356x171x51columnlocatedat
coordinateB1.

Placeanendplate(clickEndplateicon).
Theprompt:SelecttheShapetoConnectisdisplayed.

PicktheUB533x210x101memberrunningalongAxisB.
Theprompt:Selectsupportshapeor<RETURN>fornosupportshapeis
displayed.

Mar-12

131

Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

PickthecolumntodisplaytheProSteelEndplatesdialogshownbelow.

SettheparametersasshownbelowandthenpressOK.

Creating Connections Between Elements

132

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingaBasicEndPlateConnection

Clickthecheckmark.

Repeatthesestepstoplaceanotherendplatewithahaunchontheother
endofthesamebeam.

SetyourmodeltotheFR2_FRONTview.Itshouldappearasshownbelow:

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldswithintheBottomTrain
(Bt.Train)tab:

Name

Description

SelectHaunch

Specifythepositionofthehaunchaswellasanyadditionalstiffeners.
IftheTopHaunchfieldischecked,thehaunchiscreatedonthetopsideoftheshapeto
beconnected.
IftheBottomHaunchfieldischecked,thehaunchiscreatedonthebottomsideofthe
shapetobeconnected.

CopedShape

Createsthebottomtrainfromacopedshape

RectangularPlate Createsarectangularwebplate.

Mar-12

Normalto
Column

Cutsthewebplateparalleltothesupportingshape.OnlyavailablewhentheCoped
Shapeoptionisenabled.

AsPolyplate

CreatestheflangeofthebottomtrainasPolyplate.

Stiffenerin
SupportShape

IftheSupportShapefieldischecked,stiffenersareaddedtothesupportshape.These
stiffenersarecreatedinadditiontothosecreatedtogetherwiththeconnection.

133

Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

Name

Description

Stiffenerin
ConnectShape

IftheConnectionShapefieldischecked,additionalstiffenersareaddedtothe
connectionshape.

ShapeSize

Specifythehaunchplates(plates).
IftheCopedShapefieldischecked,thehaunchisnotcreatedfromindividualplatesbut
fromonecroppedshape.Theshapesizecorrespondswiththeconnectionshape.All
othershapesizefieldsaretheninsignificant.
FlangeWidthisthewidthofthehaunchflangeifthehaunchisdesignedfromplates.
FlangeThicknessisthethicknessofthehaunchflangeifthehaunchisdesignedfrom
plates.
WebThicknessisthethicknessofthehaunchwebplateifthehaunchisdesignedfrom
plates.

Dimensions

Specifiestheexteriorhaunchdimensions.Abitmapillustratingthedimensionsis
availablebypressingtheHideGraphicsbuttonatthebottomofthedialog.Different
illustrationswilldisplaydependingonthetypeofshapesizeyouselect.Thedimension
numberswillcorrespondwiththefieldnumbersinthedialog.
HaunchLength:Setsthelengthofthebottomtrain.
CutWidth:Setsthecutheightintheconnectingshape.
TopHeight:Setsthetopoftheheightofthewebplate.
FlangeWidth:Setsthewidthoftheflangeofthebottomtrain.
FlangeThickness:Setsthethicknessoftheflangeofthebottomtrain.
PlateThickness:Setsthewebplatethickness.
FacetSize:Setsthefacetsonthewebplateontheinneredges.
FacetHorizontal:Setsthehorizontalfacetontheouteredgeofthewebplate.Only
availablewhentheRectangularPlateoptionisenabled.
FacetVertical:Setstheverticalfacetontheouteredgeofthewebplate.Onlyavailable
whentheRectangularPlateoptionisenabled.
Supp.PlateWidth:Setsthewidthofthesupportingplateunderneaththecopedshape.
Supp.Plate:EnablestheInputofthestrengthplateunderneaththecopedshape.
Supp.PlateThickness:Setsthethicknessofthesupportingshapeunderneaththe
copedshape.
Supp.ShapeasPoly:Createsasupportingplateaspolyplate.

Exercise:CreatinganEndPlateConnectionwithTwoInherentGussetPlates

Creating Connections Between Elements

134

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingaBasicEndPlateConnection

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtocreateanEndPlateconnectionwitha
gussetplateontheupperandlowersurfaceofthebeam.
1

ReturntoanOverview1view,thenzoomtotheintersectionofthethree
UB533x210x101beamswiththeUB356x171x51columnlocatedat
coordinateB2.

Placeanendplate(clickEndplateicon).
Theprompt:SelecttheShapetoConnectisdisplayed.

PicktheUB533x210x101memberrunningalongAxisB.
Theprompt:Selectsupportshapeor<RETURN>fornosupportshapeis
displayed.

PickthecolumntodisplaytheProSteelEndplatesdialogshownbelow.Set
theparametersasshownbelow.Whenfinished,pressOKtoplacethe
plates.

Mar-12

135

Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

AftersettingtheparametersintheBt.TraintabfortheTopHaunch,
enabletheBottomHaunchinputthesamevaluesastheTopHaunch.This
willinserthaunchesaboveandbelowtheUB533x210x101beam.

Repeattheprocedureandplaceanotherendplatewithgussetplateson
theotherendofthesamebeam.Yourmodelshouldappearasshown
below.(FR2_FRONTview)

Exercise:CreatingEndPlateConnectionsattheRemainingIntersections

Inthisexercise,youwillfinishbuildingEndplateconnectionsbetweenbeamsand
columns.
1

AttheintersectionofallUB533x210x101beamswiththecolumnWEBS,
createanEndPlateconnection(clickEndplateicon)withthefollowing
parameters.

Creating Connections Between Elements

136

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingaBasicEndPlateConnection

Mar-12

Aftersettingtheparametersabove,switchtotheGrouptabandenable
theCreateGroupandWithBoltsoptions.Theotherparametersinthis
dialogshouldremainunchanged.

AttheIntersectionoftheUB406x178x60(locatedintheTOPelevationof
workframeFR2)withthecolumnWEBScreateEndPlateconnections(click
Endplateicon)withthefollowingparameters:

137

Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

Theremainingsettingsfortheseendplateswillremainunchanged,so
aftersettingtheLayoutparametersasshown,pressOKtoplacethe
endplate.

Creating Connections Between Elements

138

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ModifyingConnectionsUsingEditing

ModifyingConnectionsUsingEditing
Theobjectivesofthislessonareasfollows:

LearnhowtouseeditingtomodifyanexistingEndPlateconnection.

Manuallymodifyaconnectionandadd"common"boltstotwobacktoback
EndPlateconnections.

IntroducetheBOLTINGcommand.

Exercise:ModifyinganExistingEndPlateConnection
1

Zoomtothestandardisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).

ZoomintothejointbetweenthecolumnUB305x165x46andbeams
UB533x210x101atcoordinateA1.

PicktheUB533x210x101beamrunningalongAxisAtohighlightit.

RightclickandselectPS3DProperties.

FromtheShapePropertiesdialog,selecttheLogLinkstab.

SearchtheLinkuntilyoufindtheEndPlatelocatedatthisintersection.
Thiscanbeaccomplishedbyusingthearrowbuttonsatthebottomofthe
LogLinkstab.

Hint:Thenumberanddescriptionofthelinkchangesasyoucyclethroughthe

availablelinks.Alsonotethatinthemodel,asyoumovefromendplate
toendplate,theintersectingcolumnattheconnectionwillhighlight.
Thisisyourindicationthatthisisthejointthatwillbeedited.
7

Mar-12

OncetheEndPlateconnectionislocated,selecttheEditbuttontoinvoke
theeditdialog.

139

Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Modifying Connections Using Editing

EdittheconnectionasindicatedinthefigurebelowchangingtheOffsetin
thePlateDimensionssectionto350.

PresstheOKbuttontoclosethedialogandapplythechanges.

10 WhilestillintheShapePropertiesdialog,usethearrowsandcycletothe

EndPlateconnectionlocatedattheotherendofthesamebeamand
modifyitinthesamemanner.
11 SetyourmodeltoaFR1_FRONTviewandthefrontframeshouldappear

asshownbelow.

Hint:TheoffsetvaluewillbeaNegativenumberwhenthedesiredresulthas

theplateextendedbeyondthelimitsofthebeam.Thisistrueinall
casesincludinganoffsetonthetopsideofthebeam.Positivenumbers
areusedonlywhentheplateneedstobesmallerinheightthanthe
intersectingbeam.

Creating Connections Between Elements

140

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ModifyingConnectionsUsingEditing

Exercise:ManuallyModifyingElementstoChangeaConnection
1

ReturntoanOverview1viewandzoomtothejointbetweenthebeams
andthecolumnlocatedatcoordinateB1.UsetheMicroStationDelete
Elementcommandtoerasetheboltsthatexistbetweentheconnections
ofbothbeamsonAxis1andthecolumn.

Note:Eachconnectionthatwascreatedatthislocationaddedasetofboltsto

theconnection.
2

Nowthattheboltshavebeenmanuallydeleted,youwillneedtoboltthe
connectiontogetherusingthecorrectlengthbolt.Thenewlengthneeds
tobelongenoughtoaccommodatebothendplatesandthecolumnweb
thickness.

SelectBoltsfromtheProSteelmenuorclicktheBolticon.Thiswillload
theProSteelBoltStylesdialog.

ClickontheBoltingtabandsetthevaluesasshownbelow.

Thefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsinthedialogshownabove.

Mar-12

141

Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Modifying Connections Using Editing

Name

Description

BoltStyle

Containsthebolttype(e.g.,DIN558)fortheboltedconnections.Thedifferentbolt
typesarefiledindatabaseswhichallowsyoutoaddselfdefinedtypes.

SingleHoleBolt

Whenenabled,boltsarealsodefinedforsingleholes.Normally,twooppositedrill
holeswiththeirtolerancesdefinedinGeometrySettingarenecessaryforbolting.

Createdynamic
Connection

Ifthisfieldischecked,allinvolvedelementsarecreatedwithalogicallink.Thusthe
boltingcanbeautomaticallyadaptedifacomponentismodified.

BoltSettings

IntheDiameterfield,enterthediameterforthebolt(s)tobeusedintheconnection.
IntheWorkloosefield,enterthedesiredholeclearanceoftheboltedconnection,in
mostcases2mm.

Tolerances

IntheGapfield,youenterthedistanceuptowhichtwodrillholescanbeconsideredas
matchingandthecomponentpartsconcernedcanbeboltedtogether,inmostcases2
mm.
IntheAnglefield,youentertheangledifferenceoftwoholeaxes,uptowhichtwodrill
holescanbeconsideredtobewellalignedandthecomponentpartsconcernedcanbe
boltedtogether,inmostcases1.
Hint:Youshouldnotadjustthisvalueto0,sinceinsomecasesthiswouldpreventbolt
fasteningduetoaninexactcalculation,althoughinpracticalapplicationaconnection
wouldbepossible.
Bolting:Pressthisbuttontocreatetheconnections.Forthispurpose,youmustselect
allcomponentstobeconnectedaccordingtothedefinedmode(maximumof50parts
inoneoperation).Thentheprogramdefinesthepossibleboltsettingsandinsertsthe
boltsintothemodel.
SingleBolt:Pressthisbuttontoinsertasingleboltatthedesiredposition.
Turn:Pressthisbuttontorotateinsertedboltsformountingreasons.Forthispurpose,
selectallboltsthataretobeturned.

ClickontheBoltStyletabtodisplaythefieldsshownbelow.

Creating Connections Between Elements

142

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ModifyingConnectionsUsingEditing

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheBoltStyles
tabshownabove.

Name

Description

BoltStyle

Theselectedstylenameisdisplayedhere.

AdditionalParts

Theoptionsalongtheleftsideofthedisplaydeterminesthecomponentsofthebolt
connection.Asyoucheckanitem,itwillappearinthedisplaytotheright.

OptionButtons

ThebuttonsontherightsideoftheAdditionalPartssectiondisplaydialogsthatprovide
moredetailedinformationaboutthecorrespondingcomponent.Foracomponent
buttontobeenabled,youmustfirstenablecheckboxforthecorresponding
componentontheleftsideofthedialog.TheonlyexceptionistheBoltbutton.Itwill
alwaysbeenabled.
Save:Clickthisbuttontosavetheboltstyleinthedrawing.Pleasenotethatyouhave
tosavethestyleherefirstandofcoursethedrawinglater,too,tokeepthe
information.
LoadfromFile:Clickthisbuttontoloadaboltstylefromafileyoureceivede.g.from
anotheruser.

SetthevaluesasshownaboveandSavetosavethestyleinthedrawing.

Note:NewBoltStylescanbecreatedthroughtheSorttabofthedialog.Once

createdandsaved,theywillbeaddedtotheBoltStyledropdownlist.

Mar-12

143

Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Modifying Connections Using Editing

ReturntotheBoltingtabandpresstheBoltingbuttonatthebottomof
thedialog.
Theprompt:SelectallPartstobeBolted(max50):SelectObjects:
displays.

PickthecolumnandBOTHendplates.

RightMouseclick.ThiswillinsertboltsandreturnyoutotheProSteelBolt
Stylesdialog.

10 PressOKtoclosethedialog.
Hint: Youshouldnotperformthistypeofoperationuntilreadytobeginthedetailing

orcreationofaMTO.Afterperformingthisoperation,anyeditingperformed
ontheEndPlateconnectionsviathe"LogicalLinks"modificationprocedure
willreinsertboltsforeachendplatethusdoublingthequantityofbolts.

Creating Connections Between Elements

144

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ModuleReview

ModuleReview
Questions

Mar-12

TheLayoutstabletsyouchooseoneoffourpossibleconnectiontypesin
theLayoutofPlatefield.Namethefourconnectiontypes.

WhatarethetwotypesofconnectionsassignedintheConnecttab?

WhatarethefourtabsintheBoltStylesdialog?

145

Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Module Review

Answers
1

Thefourconnectiontypesare:Automatic,Splice,Normal,andFlange.

TheBoltandWeldconnectionsareassignedintheConnecttab.

TheBoltStylesdialogtabsare:Bolting,ThreadedRods,BoltStyle,and
sort.

Creating Connections Between Elements

146

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingBasePlatesandCross
Bracing
ModuleOverview
Inthismodule,youwilllearnhowtocreatebaseplatesoncolumns;howtodrill
thebaseplatetoaccommodateanchorbolts;andhowtocreatedynamicand
staticbracings.

ModulePrerequisites

BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationetc.

Previousexperiencewith3DCADsystempreferablyMicroStationV8i

Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended

ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:

Mar-12

UsetheBasePlatecommandtoinsertBaseplatesonacolumn.

CreateBasePlatesusingthePlatecommand

UsetheDrillcommand

CreateDynamiccrossbracing

147

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating Base Plates on Columns

CreatingBasePlatesonColumns
InthislessonyouwilllearnhowtousetheBasePlatecommandtoinsertbase
platesonacolumn.YouwillalsolearnhowtocreateBasePlatesusingthePlate
commandinconjunctionwiththeModifyfunctionstoshortenshapes.

Exercise:UsingtheBasePlateCommandtoInsertBasePlatesatColumns
1

Ifnotalreadyloaded,opentheTRNMODEL.dgndrawingfile.

SelectZoom/Views>IsometricOverviewfromtheProSteelmenu.

ZoominonthebottomendofthecolumnatcoordinateA1.

SelecttheBaseplatesoption:selectProSteelmenu>Connections>
BaseplatesorclickBaseplatesicon.

WhenpromptedtoSelecttheShapetoconnect,pickthecolumnnearthe
bottomend.

SetthevaluesintheProSteelDSTVBaseplatedialogasshownbelow,
startingwiththeLayouttab.

SetthevaluesintheHolestab,asshownbelow:

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing

148

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingBasePlatesonColumns

Mar-12

SetthevaluesintheConnecttab,asshownbelow:

SetthevaluesintheDatatab,asshownbelow:

149

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating Base Plates on Columns

10 SetthevaluesintheDowelstab,asshownbelow:

11 SetthevaluesintheAssignmenttab,asshownbelow:

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing

150

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingBasePlatesonColumns

12 Whenfinishedsettingtheparameterspressthecheckmark.
13 RepeatthisprocessonthecolumnatcoordinateA2,B1,B2,C1,andC2.

ThefollowingtablesprovideadescriptionofthefieldsintheProSteelDSTV
Baseplatedialog.
Name

Description

LayoutTabFieldsandDescriptions
SelectedColumn

Displaysthecolumnselectedforbaseplate.

PlateWidth

Widthofthebaseplate(paralleltothesupportflange),relatedtoaverticalsupporting
shape.

PlateHeight

Heightofthebaseplate,relatedtoaverticalsupportingshape.

PlateThickness

Thicknessofthebaseplate.

GroutThickness

Enterthegroutthickness,orhowhightheplateshallbeabovethecurrentNiveau.

AlignPlateto
ShapeNormal

ThebaseplatewillbeenteredverticallytothelongitudinalinProfileDirection:axisof
thesupportinthisfield.Ifnot,thebaseplatewillbealignedparalleltothex/yaxisof
theWCS,provided,itisa"real"support.

ShortenColumn

Thesupportingshapeisshortenedbytheplatethicknessandthegroutspace
underneathinthisfield.Otherwise,thebaseplateisfastenedtothesupport.Thepoint
ofreferenceisdeterminedbytheshapeaxisinthecaseofinclinedsupports.

FormGroup

Thebaseplateandthesupportmemberarearrangedtoformagroupinthisfield.Ifthe
supportmemberisalreadypartofanothergroup,thebaseplateisassignedtothat
group.

AsPolyplate

Ifthisfieldischecked,thebaseplateisalwaysalignedparalleltowardsthex/yplane
andthesmallesttorsionissearched.Otherwiseitisalignedparalleltowardstheflanges
.

Mar-12

151

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating Base Plates on Columns

Name

Description

HolesTabFieldsandDescriptions
InnerHoles

DrillInnerHoles:Enablethisoptiontocreateinnerholesaccordingtothesettings
below:
HoleDistance:Enterthewidthoftheinnerholefield,or0ifyouonlywantholesinthe
Height.
HoleDistance:EntertheHeightoftheinnerholefield,or0ifyouonlywantholesinthe
width.
HoleDiameter:Enterthediameteroftheinnerholefield.

OuterHoles

DrillOuterHoles:Enablethisoptiontocreateouterholesaccordingtothesettings
below:

Number:Inthesetwofields,inputthenumberofdesiredholesintheOuterHolefield.
HolefieldWidth:EnterthetotalWidthoftheouterholefield.
HolefieldHeight:EnterthetotalHeightoftheouterholefield.
HoleDiameter:Enterthediameteroftheouterholefield.

ConnectTabFieldsandDescriptions
WithTieBolts

IfWithTieBoltsisselected,theanchorboltsaredisplayedbysymbolsandcanbe
enteredinthepartslist.

WithAnchorbolts Insertsanchorboltsalsointheouterholefield.
outside
Label

Descriptionfortheanchorbolts.

UseDowel

UseAnchorDowelsinsteadofasymbolicbolt.Thedowelsarestoredinadatabase
whichisdefinedinthefieldbelow.Thebrowsebuttonallowsyoutonavigatetothe
desireddatabase.

WeldStyle

Definetheweldstyletobeusedinthisfield.

WeldFlangeSide

Enablethisoptiontouseweldsontheflangesideoftheconnectionshape.The
thicknessfieldnexttothisoptionallowsyoutoenterthethicknessoftheweldifyou
wanttooverridetheweldstylethickness.

WeldWebSide

Enablethisoptiontouseweldsonthewebsideoftheconnectionshape.Thethickness
fieldnexttothisoptionallowsyoutoenterthethicknessoftheweldifyouwantto
overridetheweldstylethickness.

DataTabFieldsandDescriptions
ColumnLoadin
kN

Maximumforcetobecarriedbytheplate.

Holediameter

Listofstandardizedholediameters.

Concrete

Concretegradeoftheelements.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing

152

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingBasePlatesonColumns

Name

Description

Available
Standard
Baseplates

YouwillfindbaseplatesfortheclickedsupportingshapeunderSelectionTemplates.
ThesearedefinedaccordingtothestandardDASTguidelines.
Thevaluesinthefieldsbelowaredisplayedandcanbechanged.Whenyouselecta
plate,thebaseplateisimmediatelyattached;youcanthendirectlychecktheresult
andmakemodifications,ifnecessary.
Note:Theplatewidthandtheplateheightrefertoverticalsupports.Thevaluesare
correspondinglyincreasedtomaintaintheshapeedgesinthecaseofinclinedsupports.

Clone

Pressthisbuttontoapplythedataofanalreadyexistingbaseplatetoanewplate.This
requiresthatyoupresstheExistingBasePlatebutton.

Exercise:Preparingtheelementforamanualbaseplate

TheremaybetimeswhenusingtheBasePlatecommandmaynotbethebest
methodofaddingabaseplate.Inthesesituationsyoucancreatethebaseplate
byshorteningthecolumnusingtheModify
commandandtheninsertingthe
plateusingtheplatefunctions.
1

Zoomtothestandardisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).

ZoominonthebaseofcolumnlocatedatcoordinateB3.

OpentheElementModificationdialog(clickModifyicon).

ClickontheShapestab.YouwillusetheShortenShapesbyDefault
functiontoshortenourcolumnbyadistanceequaltoourfabricatedbase
platethickness.

SettheDefaultfieldvalueto25mm.

PresstheByDefaultbuttonandwhenpromptedto:Selectshapeatthe
Endtobeshortened.

Pickthecolumnneartheend.Thiswillshortenthecolumnbythevalueof
25mm.

Hint:BeforeusingtheShortenbyDefaultfunction,makesuretowindowinon

theelementtobeshortened.Asthecommandautomaticallyshortens
thecolumnwhenpickedwhenzoomedoutyoumaynotnoticethe
shorteningoftheelementandwillpickthesameelementtwice,thus
shorteningtheshapeasecondtime.
8

PressOKtoclosethedialog.

Usingthesameprocess,shortenthecolumnlocatedatcoordinateC3.

Mar-12

153

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating Base Plates on Columns

Exercise:CreatingabaseplateusingthePlatescommand
1

WhilestillzoomedinonthecolumnatcoordinateC3,invokethePlates
command(ProSteelmenu>Plates)orclickPlatesicon.

IntheProSteelPlates/Polyplatesdialogsettheparametersasshown
below.MakesuretoselecttheCENTERinsertionpointintheimageofthe
plate.

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheProSteelPlates/
Polyplatesdialog.
Name

Description

Length

Setstheplatelengthiftheplateisrectangular.

Width

Setstheplatewidthoftheplateisrectangular.

Thickness

Thicknessoftheplatetobecreated.Eitherenteravalueorselectavaluefromthelist.

HeightOffset

Theinsertionplaneoftheplateismovedbythisvalueinnegativedirectiontowardsthe
referenceplane(activeACSorelementACS).

Dimensions

EntertheplatedimensionintotheLengthandWidthfieldsifyouhaveselectedthe
contourRectangular.

XOffset

SetstheplateXOffsetiftheplateisrectangular.

YOffset

SetstheplateYOffsetiftheplateisrectangular.

ItemNo

ChangesthePlatearticlenumber

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing

154

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingBasePlatesonColumns

Name

Description

Grid

IftheActiveLayerfieldisenabled,theplatesarenotinsertedintheplatelevel(default
isPS_PLATE)butratherinthecurrentMicroStationlevel.
IftheGridfieldisenabled,anadditionalgridisvisibleattheuppersidetodisplay
gridirons,forexample.

InsertPlane

Hereyouindicatethereferenceplanefortheinsertionoftheplate.
IftheCurrentACSfieldismarked,thecornerpointsofthepolylinearereferencedwith
thecurrentACSwhencreatingtheplateifyouhaveselectedthecontourAdapt
Contour.ThisisthestandardcaseifthedrawnplylineislocatedwithintheACS.
IftheObjectACSfieldismarked,theelementACSofthepolylineisconsideredtobe
thereferenceplanewhencreatingtheplateifyouhaveselectedthecontourAdapt
Contour.UsethissettingifthepolylineisnotlocatedinthecurrentACSandyouwant
toinsertaplatetoit.
TheUserDefinedPlaneisdefinedbytwolines(onwhichyouhavetoclick).Thus,this
willallowyoutoalignaplateonashape.Thisisworkingwhenyoucreateaplateby
selectingpoints.

InsertEdge

TheselectionTop,Middle,orBottomdeterminestheinsertionplaneoftheplate.
Pleasenotethatthevaluesfortheinsertionheightapplyuptothisplane.

Options

Label:Allowsyoutoselectthenameofthepolyplate
Material:Choosethematerialfromthislist,whichwillbeassociatedwiththeplateinthe
partslist.
DisplayClass:EnablestheselectionoftheDisplayClassoftheplate.
Description:EnablestheselectionoftheFreeDescriptionoftheplate.
ActiveLayer:EnablesyoutoselecttheLevelfortheplate.

InsertPolypoint:Insertsapolypointbyspecifiedpoints.
Placement
Options(inorder InsertonPolygon:Insertsaplatebyaselectedpolygon,circleorarc.
oficons)
InsertRectangularPlate:Insertsarectangularplateonaninsertionpoint.
InsertRectangularPlate:Insertsarectangularplateonaselecteddiagonal.
RectangularonLine:Insertsarectangularplatealongaline.
FourPoints:IftheBy4Pointsfieldischecked,youdeterminetheformoftheplateby
pickinganyfourpointsinthespaceyoulike.Thefirstthreepointsdetermineatthesame
timetheinsertionplaneoftheplate.Thefourthpointisplumbedtowardsthisplane.Thus
youhavethepossibilitytocreateaplatewithoutsettingtheACSbefore.
SteelintoPoly:Transformsalreadyinsertedflatsteelshapesintoplates.Thiscansome
timesbeuseful,ifyouwanttocarryoutmodificationswhichcannotbemadewitha
shape.
Template:Allowstheusertonameandsavethecurrentsettingsasatemplatethatcan
berecalledlater.
Dimension:Pressthisbuttontorespecifythereferencelinefortheplatelength.
Grid:Enablethisoptiontorespecifythereferencelinefortheplategrid.
AdditionalFlange:Enablescreationofadditionalflangestoaplate.

PresstheInsertbuttonatthebottomofthedialogandwhenprompted
to:PickInsertpointoftheRectangularPlate,pickthebottomshapepoint
ofthecolumn.
Theplatewillbecreatedatthispointandyouwillreturntothedialog.

Mar-12

RepeattheprocessonthecolumnlocatedatcoordinateB3.

155

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Drilling the Base Plate to Accommodate Anchor Bolts

DrillingtheBasePlatetoAccommodateAnchorBolts
Inthislesson,youwilllearnhowtousetheDrillcommand.

Exercise:DrillingtheBaseplate

Nowthatyouhaveinsertedthebaseplates,youwillneedtodrilltheseto
accommodateanchorbolts.UsetheDrillcommandtoaccomplishthis.
1

Zoomtothestandardisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).

Zoomintotheareaofthebaseplatelocatedatthebaseofthecolumn
locatedatcoordinateB3.

SelecttheDrilloption(ProSteelmenu>Drill)orclickDrillicon.

IntheProSteelDrilldialogloadssettheparametersshownbelow.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing

156

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DrillingtheBasePlatetoAccommodateAnchorBolts

Thefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsinthedialog.
Name

Description

HoleField
Description

Layout:Thefollowingoptionsareavailabletosetthelayouttypefortheholefield:
Rectangular:Forarectangulardrillholefield,thedrillholesarearrangedasarectangle
withrowsandcolumnsaroundtheinsertionpoint.
Radial:Ataradialdrillholefield,thedrillholesarearrangedinacompleteorpartial
circlearoundtheinsertionpoint.Whenthisoptionisselected,additionalinputfields
willbedisplayedasshowninthedialogbymeansofwhichrounddrillholefieldscanbe
determined.
SingleHoles:Whenthisboxisactivated,thedrillholedescriptionisignored,andyou
candrillindividualholesintotheshape
Shape/XDir:Descriptionofdrillholefieldinshapedirection,forplatesinxdirectionof
theACS.Detailsonhowtodescribeadrillholefieldaregivenonthenextpage.
Cross/YDir:Descriptionofdrillholefieldperpendiculartotheshapedirection,for
platesinydirectionoftheACS.
Number/Radius:EnterthenumberofdrillholestobecreatedintheNumberfieldand
theradiuswhichthedrillholesaredistributedaroundtheinsertionpointintheRadius
field.
Area/Start:IntheAreafield,enterthenumberofdegreesthattheboltholesaretobe
distributedaround(forinstancethevalue180forasemicircle).Ifyouenterthevalue0,
thecompletecirclewillbeused.Youcanenteranangleofthefirstdrillholetowards
theinsertionXaxisofthecomponentintheinputfieldStartifthepartialcirclehasto
berotated.
ShapeCenter:WhentheShapeCenterboxhasbeenclicked,allpointsontheshape
centerlineareputperpendiculartotheshapecenter.
IftheShowAxisfieldischecked,themidline,gravityline,andtracingdimensionsare
displayedafterclickingtheshape.Theaxesareremovedagainafterthedrillinghas
concluded.

Data

Diameter:Entertheholediameterhere.
Workloose:Additiontotheholediameterasentered,e.g.,forgalvanizing.
SlotLength:IfintheinputfieldSlotAxisavaluebiggerthan0hasbeenentered,the
holeisdrilledasslottedhole.Theenteredvaluedeterminesthedistancebetweenthe
twoholeswhicharedrilledasslottedholes.
Incaseofaslottedhole,twodrillholeswithapitchasenteredintheinputfieldwillbe
created,andthespaceinbetweenwillbecutout.

Mar-12

157

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Drilling the Base Plate to Accommodate Anchor Bolts

Name

Description

Layoutand
Position

HoleType:
DrillThroughmeansthatthematerialwillbecompletelydrilledthrough.(Ifatopflange
isdrilled,thebottomflangewillnotbedrilledthrough.)
DrillBlinkHolemeansthatthedrillholehasthedepthasenteredintheBoreHole
Depthfield.
Weldmarksmeansthatsmallholesarespotdrilledformarkingaddonpieces.
Dimensioningofthesesmallholescanbecarriedoutautomatically.
FlangeSelection:
UpperChordmeansthattheflangewhichis"reachedfirstbythedrill"willbedrilled.
LowerChordmeansthatthesecondflangewhichis"reachedbythedrill"willbe
drilled.Thisfunctionallowsabottomflangefromthetopviewtobedrilledonthe
shape.
BothChordsmeansthatbothflangesaredrilled.
CreateThreadedhole:Createsathreadedhole.Thiswillappeardifferentlyin2D.
Single:Youcaninsertthecompleteholefieldorseveralsingleholesintooneshape.
First,clicktheshapeortheplate.Thenclickortypetheholefieldinsertionpoint.
Whenhavingselectedsingleholes,youcaninsertdifferentsingleholesuntilyoupress
theEnterkeyortherightmousebutton.
Allholeswillbedrillednow.
Multiple:Youcaninsertholesinseveralshapesatthesametime,e.g.,whenshapesare
placeduponeachother,andaholeforathroughrodshallbedrilled.First,clickall
desiredshapesorplatesandthendrilltheholesasdescribedinSingle.

Eachoftheselectedshapesbeinghitbyanimaginarybeamthatstartsattheinserted
drillholes(inbothdirections,thebeamdirectionisthepositionoftheholeaxis!)willbe
drilledatthepointofimpact,theholesizebeingidentical.Thus,theholesareexactly
aligned.
Adopt:Drillholesinshapescanbetakenoveraccordingtothe"beamprincipal"
describedinMultiple.Inthiscase,theentriesinthedialogareignored.First,clickall
shapeswithholestobetransferredandthenallshapestoadoptthehole.Usingthis
function,drillholesfromaconnectingplatemayberapidlytransferredtoashape.

PresstheSettingstabandsetthevaluesshownbelow.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing

158

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DrillingtheBasePlatetoAccommodateAnchorBolts

Hint:Iftheholesarenotimmediatelyvisible,changetheViewDisplayto

Wireframe.
Thefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsinthedialog.
Name

Description

HoleTypeGroup

NormalDrill:theholesaredrilledasnormalholeswhicharedrilledthroughandwhich
alwayshavethesamediameter.
Countersunk:Ifthisfieldisenabled,theholesaredrilledascountersunkholes.Inthe
neighbouringinputfields,youcanspecifythecountersunkdepthandtheopeningangle
ofthehole.
StepHole:theholesaredrilledasstepholewithtwodifferentdiameters.Theupper
diameterisbiggerthanthelowerdiameter.Intheneighbouringinputfields,youcan
specifythedepthandthediameteroftheupperholesection.

Depth/Angle

Depthsetsthelengthofthestraightpartofthecountersunkhole.
TheAnglesetstheupperopeningangleforthecountersunkhole.

Depth/Radius

DepthsetstheLengthofthelowerpartofthestephole.
TheRadiussetsdiameteroftheupperpartofthestephole.

HoleType

Mar-12

HoleType:TheselectionlistoffersyouseveralHoleTypestochoosefrom,which
determineshowthedrillholesappearinthedetailedshopdrawings.Youcanchoose
fromHoleRepresentation,FieldDrill,FieldBolt,orShopBolt.

159

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Drilling the Base Plate to Accommodate Anchor Bolts

Name

Description

Offset

Youcandefinearelativeoffsetbywhichtheactualholeinsertionpointtobemoved
awayfromtheclickedpoint.Thisenablesyoutooffsetthestartingpointofahole
groupagainsttheshapestartingpointandclickonthestartingpoint,ortoinsert
asymmetricallypositionedholegroups.
NoOffsetmeansthattheclickedpointcorrespondstotheinsertionpoint.
RectangularOffsetmeansthattheoffsetdataintheDistanceboxareassumedasx/y
values.
PolarOffsetmeansthattheoffsetdataintheDistanceboxareassumedasdistance/
pitchvalues.

Rotation

Here,youcanspecifyarotationofthedrillholefieldaroundtheinsertionpoint.

Distances

Theseboxesareactivatedifyouselectedarelativeoffsetunder'Offset'.Ifyouhave
selectedRectangularasoffset,youcanenterthetwodistancesintheinputfieldsX
OffsetandYOffset.IfyouhaveselectedPolarasoffset,youcanenterthedistanceand
theangleinthecorrespondinginputfieldsDistanceandAngle.

Monitor

Here,youcanverifytheselecteddrillholefieldanddeterminetheinsertionpointby
meansofthesmallpoints.Thebiggerredpointshowsthecurrentinsertionpoint.

ReturntotheDimensionstabandpresstheSinglebuttonfromthe
bottomofthedialog.

Attheprompt:"Selecttheelementtobedrilled",picktheplate.

Whenpromptedto:"PicktheInsertionpointofDrillPattern",pickthe
bottomendofthecolumn.
Thiswilladdtheholestotheplateandreturnyoutothedialog.

PressOKtoendthefunction.

10 Repeatthesameprocedureonthecolumnsbaseplatelocatedat

coordinateC3.
Hint:Whendrillingobjects,besuretohavetheACSinthetopplaneofthe

objecttobedrilledorpicktheinsertionpointofthedrillpatternasthe
topsurfaceoftheobject.TheDrillcommandoperatesexactlylikeareal
worlddrillingprocess.Youwouldnotdrillupfromthebottomofthe
plate.Whendrillingashapesuchasawideflangeitisonlynecessaryto
picktheshapepointoftheobjectasthedrillpatterninsertionpointas
theswitches"DrillFirstFlange","DrillNextFlange",and"DrillBoth
Flanges"willcontroltheactualACSplanefromwhichthedrillpattern
originates.
Yourmodelshouldappearasshownbelow.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing

160

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DrillingtheBasePlatetoAccommodateAnchorBolts

Mar-12

161

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

CreationofDynamicandStaticBracings

Exercise:PreparingtoCreateDynamicCrossBracing

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtopreparetheTRNMODEL.DGNtocreate
DynamicCrossbracing.
1

Zoomtothestandardisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).

Hint:Tobeginthecrossbracingcommandyouneedtopreparethemodel.

Thisrequiresyoutosettheviewofthemodeltotheframethatwill
containthecrossbracingandtocreateconstructionlinestoactasyour
guidesforthebracing.
2

ChangethedisplaytothesavedFR1_FRONTview(clickChooseView
icon).

Whenthedialogappears,selecttheFR1_FRONTviewfromthelistand
presstheSetViewbuttontosetmodeltothisview.

CreatetherequiredconstructionlinebydrawingaMicroStationline.

Whenpromptedto:SpecifytheStartPointofLine,selecttheobject
centreoftheupperrighthandbeam.

Next,selectthelowercentrepointofthelefthandcolumn.

Yourmodelshouldappearasshownbelow.

Exercise:DefiningandinsertingDynamicCrossBracing

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtodefineandcreateDynamicCrossBracing.
1

WhilestillintheFR1_FRONTviewselecttheDynamicBracingoption
(ProSteelmenu>Connections>DynamicBracing)orclicktheConnections
icon,followedbyclickingtheDynamicBracingicon.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing

162

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreationofDynamicandStaticBracings

Whenpromptedto:"PickSystemLineofBraceMember<Line>,Point",
picktheMicroStationdiagonallinebetweenthecolumns.

Whenpromptedto:"SelectfirstmainmembertoconnectBrace:",pick
thelefthandcolumn.

Whentheprompt:"SelectsecondmainmembertowhichBraceconnects
atoppositeend:"displays,picktheRighthandcolumn.
ThiswillopentheProSteelBracingdialog.Settheparametersasshown
below.

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheCommon
tab.

Mar-12

Name

Description

Shapes

Indicatestheutilizedshapesforthebracingbars.EntertheShapeCatalogintothefirst
selectionbox,theShapeTypeintothesecond,andtheShapeSizeintothethird.

PlateThickness

Indicatesthethicknessofthegussetplate.

EdgeDistanceto

DeterminestheminimumdistancebetweenBordersorBorderobjectstothebracing
rods.

RoundShape
Lengthto

Roundsthecalculatedlengthofthebracingrodstothisvalue.

PlateWidth
Minimum

Setsthemaximumwidthofthegussetplatesifthetriangularsymmetricisselected.

Offset

SelectshowfartheGussetPlatesshalloverlaptheBracingRodssideways.

Depthaccord.
ACS

SetsthedepthoftheBracingaccordingtotheACSsystem

163

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

Name

Description

GussetPosition

SetsthepositionoftheGussetplatesaccordingtotheconnectionplane.

GussetType

SetstheformoftheGussetPlates.

ButtStrap
Rectangular
TriangularMinimised
TriangularSymmetrical

OpeningAngle

Hereyoucandeterminetheopeningangleofthegussetplatetowardsthebracingbar
attheshape'Trianglebent'

CrossBracing

Ifthisswitchisenabled,thebracingisdesignedintheformofacrossstay.Otherwise,
onlyonebracingbarisaddedtotheclickedonsystemline.

WeldedBracing

Ifthisswitchisenabled,thebracingisweldedinitsentirety.Noboringsareaddedin
thatcase.

FormGroup

Ifthisswitchisenabled,theindividualbracingelementsareformedintogroups.

Symmetrical

Ifthisswitchisenabled,thebracingisdesignedintheformofacrossstayandremains
symmetricalifmodified.Otherwise,everybarcanbechangedindividually.

Dynamic

Ifthisswitchisenabled,thebracingimmediatelydepictsthemodificationsmadeinthe
dialog.Ifyouwouldliketomodifymanyvalues,youcandeactivatethisoptionforthe
timebeing.
AddCuttingEdge:Bypressingthisbutton,youcanaddadditionalboundaryedges
(lines)forthegussetplatecalculation.

DeleteCuttingEdge:Pressthisbuttontodeleteanadditionalboundaryedge.

TostoptheCreationofagussetplateattheendofabracingbar,justclickonthis
button.

Includesbracingbarwhichdoesn'tbelongtothebracinginthecreationofagusset
plate

Excludesanybracingbarwhichdoesn'tbelongtothebracingfromthecreationofa
gussetplate.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing

164

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreationofDynamicandStaticBracings

Hint:TheBracingcommandmayrequirethatyou"AddCuttingEdge"inorder

tobetterdefinethelimitsofthebracingandthegussetplates.Thismay
notbeenoughtoproperlydefinetheplateinwhichcaseyoucanuse
additionalMODIFYcommandstoshapetheplatesasneeded.This
wouldincludesuchcommandsas"Extend/TrimtoLine".Alsoof
importanceisthatDynamicbracingcanbemodifiedafteritsinitial
insertion.Itwillalsodynamicallyadjustaschangesaremadetothe
adjacentmembersandthedistancebetweenthem.

Mar-12

Tocleanupthebracinggussetplates,returntotheCommontabofthe
ProSteelBracingdialog.SelecttheAddCuttingEdgefunction.

Selecttheundersideofthebeamtoreshapeandadjustthegussetplates.
Whenfinished,pressOKtoclosethedialog.

165

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

Exercise:PreparingtoCreateStaticbracing

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtopreparethemodeltocreateStaticBracing.
1

Zoomtothestandardisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).

Hint:Tobeginthecrossbracingcommandyouneedtopreparethemodel.

Thisrequiresyoutosettheviewofthemodeltoyourframethatwill
containthecrossbracingandtocreateconstructionlinestoactasyour
guidesforthebracing.
2

ChangethedisplaytothesavedFR2_BACKview(clickChooseViewicon).

Whenthedialogappears,selecttheFR2_BACKviewfromthelistand
presstheSetViewbuttontosetmodeltothisview.

NowyouwillcreatetheconstructionlineforourStaticbracing.Invokethe
linecommandandwhenpromptedtospecifythefirstpoint,selectapoint
closetothebottomofthelefthandcolumntoplacethestartofthelineat
thebaseofthecolumn.

Attheprompt:"SpecifyNextPoint:"

SelectthesnapandthenselecttheCENTERofthecrossbeam.
Anasteriskwillbedisplayedatthecentreofthebeamtoconfirmyouare
inthecorrectlocation.

Forthelastsegmentofthelinesnaptothecentreofthecolumnbase.
Yourmodelshouldappearasshownbelow.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing

166

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreationofDynamicandStaticBracings

Exercise:DefiningandinsertingStaticBracing

InthisexerciseyouwilldefineandinsertStaticBracingcomponents.
1

SelecttheStaticBracingoption.(ProSteelmenu>Connections>Static
Bracing)orclickStaticBracingicon.ThiswillopentheProSteelStatic
Bracingdialog.SettheparametersintheShapestabasshownbelow.

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheShapestab
oftheProSteelBracingdialog.

Mar-12

Name

Description

ShapeType

Selectstheshapetypeforthebracingrods.

ShapeClass

SelectstheshapethatwillbedisplayedinthefieldShapeWindow.

167

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

Name

Description

Resolution

Selectstheresolutioninwhichthebracingrodswillbeinserted.

ShapeSize

Determinestheshapesizeforthebracingrods

ACSLocation

Thepositionofthegussetplatewithrespecttotheplaneofthebracingisdetermined.
Thefirstimageshowstheplatefrontedge.ThesecondimageshowstheplateCenter
andthethirdimageshowstheplaterearedge.

RodInsertion

Determinesthepositionoftherodwithrespecttotheinsertionline(systemline).
YoucaninserttherodintheMiddle,ontheGravityline,orontheRootline.

RodPosition

Youcandeterminethepositionoftherodwithrespecttothebracingplane.Youcan
checktheselectedpositionintheShapeWindowintheupperrightcornerofthedialog
field.
Frontsidemeansthattherodisflushwiththefrontedgeofthegussetplate(more
precise:inpositivezdirectionoftheACS).
Backsidemeansthattherodisflushwiththerearedgeofthegussetplate(more
precise:innegativezdirectionoftheACS).
Bothsidesmeansthatarodispositionedonbothsidesofthegussetplate.
CenteredmeansthattherodaxisisinacenteredpositionintheACSplane.

Rotation

Youcaninserttherodinitsnormalpositionorrotatedby+90degreesor90degrees.
YoucanchecktheselectedmodeintheShapeWindowintheupperrightcornerofthe
dialogfield.

Mirror

Theshapecanbeinsertedinanormalormirroredway.Youcanchecktheselected
modeintheShapeWindowintheupperrightcornerofthedialog.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing

168

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreationofDynamicandStaticBracings

Name

Description

PlateThickness

Thicknessofgussetplates.

Placement
Options

Youcancreatebracingrodsandgussetplatesinoneoperation.However,the
commandisnotsuitablefortheconnectionofseveralrodsfromdifferent
systems.Thisshouldbedoneusingasinglefunction.Youwillreturntothe
dialogfieldaftercreation.
Youcaninsertsinglerodsthatareautomaticallydrilled.Youwillreturntothe
dialogfieldaftercreation
Existingshapesaredrilledontheirends,accordingtothedefinitionsinthe
dialogfield.Youmustselecttheshapesforthispurpose.Youwillreturntothe
dialogfieldafterwards.
Agussetplatewillbecreatedautomatically.
SelectBracingRodsthathavealreadybeendrilledandthenclickBoundaryLines
forthePlateEdges.Theprogramwilltrytofindasuitableplatedimensionbykeeping
theedgedistancesandtheboundarylines.Itmaybenecessarytopickonepointatthe
plannedbracingend.Clicktheapproximatepositionofthegussetplate.Youwillreturn
tothedialogfieldafterwards.
Youcandeterminetheshapeofthegussetplate.
Selectthedrilledbracingrodsthataretobeconnectedandpickapointonthe
plannedbracingend.Clicktheapproximatepositionofthegussetplate.Theedge
distanceswillbedisplayed.
Youthendefinetheshapeoftheplatebyclickingtheedgepointsofapolyline.Youcan
checktheshapebeingcreated.Thefunctionsavailableforcreatingthepolylinearethe
sameasthoseavailablefordrawingapolylineusingMicroStation.Thedialogwillbe
restoredaftercreatingtheplate.
IfyouhavenotdeterminedtheACSplanebeforeusingthecommand,youcan
dothissubsequently:theactiveACSplane(andconsequentlytheplaneofthe
bracing)willbedeterminedbyclicking3points.Youwillreturntothedialog
fieldafterwards.

Mar-12

ClickontheConnecttabandsettheparametersasshownbelow.

169

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheConnecttab
oftheProSteelBracingdialog.
Name

Description

BoltStyle

Determinesthestyleofbolt.

Diameter

Determinesthediameterofthebolts.

Workloose

WorkloosebetweentheHolediameterandBoltdiameter.

NumberShape

Youcanenterthenumberofbolts(drillholes)inshapedirectionoftherodoneach
shapeend.Thespacingwillresultfromtheselectedboltdiameter.

NumberCross

Setsthenumberofboltsnormaltothebracingroddirection.

Distance

Setsthespacingoftheholesnormaltothebracingroddirection.

HolePosition

Youcandeterminethepositionoftheholesintherod.Youcaninserttheholesinthe
Middle,ontheGravityline,oronthePitchline.

WeldBracing

TheshapesandgussetplatesarenotdrillediftheWeldBracingfieldisselected.The
dimensionsofthegussetplates,however,aredeterminedasifdrillholeswereexisting.

Platewithout
Edges

TheedgesofthegussetplatearenotbeveledbutrightangledifthePlatewithoutEdge
fieldisenabled.

CreateGroup
WithBolts

AgroupisformedforeachrodiftheCreateGroupfieldisselected.
TheboltsofthebracingrodtobeconnectedarealsoallocatedtothegroupiftheWith
Boltsfieldisselected.

Next,settheparametersoftheDistancetabasshownbelow.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing

170

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreationofDynamicandStaticBracings

Hint:Asyouarebuildingastaticbracing,youwillneedtobuildthisin

sections.Firstyouwilldefinethebracingangles.
4

FromwithinthedialogpresstheRodbutton.Whenpromptedto:Pick
SystemLineofBraceMember<Line>Point,picktheMicroStationlineon
theleft.

Whenpromptedto:"PickBorderLineofBraceMemberorReturnforEnd
<Line>,Back,Point,"picktheleftcolumn.

Attheprompt:"PickBorderLineofBraceMemberorReturnforEnd
<Line>,Back,Point",pickthecrossbeamatthetop.

Whenpromptedathirdtimeto:"PickBorderLineofBraceMemberor
ReturnforEnd<Line>,Back,Point",rightclicktoendthedefinitionphase
andbringuptheBracingRodLengthmodificationdialog.

Settheactuallengthoftherodtomatchthefigurebelow,thenpressOK.

Repeatthisfunctionfortheotherbracerod.

Hint:Nowyouneedtocreatethegussetplatesateachendofthebracing

rods.

Mar-12

171

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

Ontheendsthatmeetthecolumnsyouwillcreatetwosinglerodplates.
Attheintersectionofthetworodswiththecrossbeamyouwillcreatea
commonplateforbothrods.
10 IftheProSteelBracingdialogisnotdisplayed,openitnowandpressthe

PlateAutobutton.
11 Whenpromptedto:PickConnectionEndofBraceMembertobe

connectedorReturnforEnd:SelectObjects:,pickthelowerendoftheleft
bracingrodandrightclick.
Theprompt:PickBorderLineforGussetPlateorReturnforEnd
<Line>,Back,Pointdisplays.
12 Picktheinsideedgeofthecolumnflange.
13 Whenpromptedasecondtimeto:"PickBorderLineforGussetPlateor

ReturnforEnd<Line>,Back,Point",rightclick.
14 Whenpromptedto:"PickaPointattheProposedBraceEnd:",rightclick

toplacethegussetplateandreturntotheStructuralBracingdialog.
Note:Ifpickingtheedgeofthebeamisnotrecognizedbythecommand,type

P(forpoint)whenaskedtoselectborder,thendefine2pointsalong
theedgeofthebeam.
15 Repeatthesameprocessatthelowerendoftherightbracingrod.
16 Repeattheprocessonemoretimeatthetopendofthebothbracing

rods.
17 PressthePlateAutobutton.Whenpromptedto:PickConnectionEndof

BraceMembertobeconnectedorReturnforEnd:Selectobjects:,pickthe
upperendofBOTHbracingrodswheretheymeetthecrossbeamand
rightclick.
18 Whenpromptedto:"PickBorderLineforGussetPlateorReturnforEnd

<Line>,Back,Point",pickintheloweredgeoftheflangeonthecrossbeam
andrightclicktoplacethegussetplateandreturntothebracingdialog.
19 PressOKtoexitthecommand.

Yourmodelatthelocationofthebracingshouldappearasbelow.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing

172

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ModuleReview

Hint: WhenaddinggussetplatesyoucanusetheSelectPlatefunctiontodefinethe

plate.Youmustpickthebracingrodneartheendtoreceivetheplateandthen
pickapointnearthegussetplateend.Thiswillhighlighttheelementwiththe
edgesoftheplatelimitsandyouthenmustbuildaboundarythatdefinesthe
shapeoftheplate.

ModuleReview
Nowthatyouhavecompletedthismodule,let'smeasurewhatyouhavelearned.

Questions

Mar-12

WhatisthedifferencebetweenDynamicBracingandStaticBracing?

Canyoupickthelengthorwidthofacolumnandsetthosevaluesasthe
sizeofyourbaseplate?

173

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Module Review

Answers
1

WhatisthedifferencebetweenDynamicBracingandStaticBracing?
WithStaticyoucreatethevariouspartsofthebracingmanually.

Canyoupickthelengthorwidthofacolumnandsetthosevaluesasthe
sizeofyourbaseplate?
Yes,yourightmouseclickonthelengthorwidthonthedialogandselect
thepicklengthoption.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing

174

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

PurlinCourses,WebAngles
andShearPlateConnections
ModuleOverview
Inthismodule,youwilllearnhowtopreparethemodelforthecreationof
purlins.Youwillalsolearnhowtocreateandmodifypurlins.

ModulePrerequisites

BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationetc.

Previousexperiencewitha3DCADsystem,preferablyMicroStationV8i

Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended

ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:

Mar-12
Connections

PreparethemodelforthecreationofPurlins

CreatetwoPurlinsintheupperelevationofourstructure

ModifythePurlinstopreparefordetailingthejoints

Copeshapesandcreateatemplateofthecopeforfutureuse

Addwebanglestothecopedelementsandaddwebangleswherethecopeis
calledfromwithinthewebanglecommand

175

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate

Introductory Knowledge

IntroductoryKnowledge
Beforeyoubeingthismodule,let'sdefinewhatyoualreadyknow.

Questions
1

HowdoyousetanAuxiliaryCoordinateSystem(ACS)inMicroStation?

HowdoyourotateACStothetopofabeamusingProSteel?

176

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate Connections


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

IntroductoryKnowledge

Answers
1

HowdoyousetanAuxiliaryCoordinateSystem(ACS)inMicroStation?
GotoUtilities>AuxiliaryCoordinatesandchoosetheappropriateoption
fromthedialog(forexampleDefineACSbypoints).

HowdoyourotateACStothetopofabeamusingProSteel?
ChoosetheObjectACSatPointoptionfromtheProSteelViewcommands
toolbox.

Mar-12
Connections

177

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating the Purlins

CreatingthePurlins
Thissectiondescribeshowtocreatethepurlins.

Exercise:PreparingtheModelforthePurlin

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtosettheACStotheproperplaneforthe
creationofthePurlin.
1

Movetoanisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).

SettheACSusingtheMicroStationDefineACS(ByPoints).

SelectPointsasbelow.

178

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate Connections


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingthePurlins

SavetheACSasPurlin.

Exercise:CreatingthePurlins(RoofPurlins)

Inthisexercise,youwillcreatethePurlins.

Mar-12
Connections

FromtheProSteelStructuralElementstoolbarpressthePurlinicon.

Whenpromptedto:"SelectlowerleftedgeofPurlindistribution,orESC
forsecondaryBeams",pickthetoplefthandcornerofthebeamongrid
lineB.

Whenpromptedto:SpecifyupperrightedgeofPurlinelement,pickthe
toprighthandcornerofthebeamongridlineC.

Seebelowforthepurlininsertionpoints.

179

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating the Purlins

WhentheProSteelPurlindialogappears,settheparametersasshown
belowandthenpressOK.

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheCommon
tab.
Name

Description

Angle

Thepurlinsarerotatedaroundthisanglevalue,whichmeanstheyarearrangedina
diagonalfashion.

HeightOffset

ThisallowsyoutomovethepurlincourseinpositiveZdirectionbyapplyingthe
indicatedvalue.

180

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate Connections


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingthePurlins

Name

Description

Dynamic

Ifthisfieldischecked,themodificationsofthesettingscanbemonitoredimmediately
onscreen.

Symmetrical

Ifthisfieldischecked,theareatobefilled(objectframe)remainssymmetrical.

DrawDiagonal

Ifthisfieldischecked,theareatobefilled(objectframe)ismarkedwithtwoadditional
diagonals.

CutatEdge

Ifthisfieldischecked,thepurlinsattheedgesoftheareatobefilledarecutflush.
ValuesinthefieldLeftProjectionandRightProjectionarethennotconsidered.

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheDimensions
tab.

Mar-12
Connections

Name

Description

FixedGrid

Ifthe'Grid'fieldischecked,youcanindicateintheneighboringinputfieldthe
approximatedistanceofthepulinswithintheareabetweenfirstandlastpurlin.The
programdividesthedistancesregularlyaccordingtothisspecificationandthevalueis
roundedupordowncorrespondingly.Theactualdistancesthenaredisplayedinthe
EffectiveGridField.

FreeGrid

Ifthe'Grid'fieldisnotchecked,youcanfreelydefinethegriddivisionwithinthearea
betweenthefirstandlastpurlininthe'Distances'list.Youcanvarythenumberandthe
distances,asyoulike.

Turn

Thedistancesareusedinverted.

OffsetBottom

Thedistancefromthecenterlineofthelowestpurlintotheouteredgeoftheselected
area.

181

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating the Purlins

Name

Description

OffsetTop

Thedistancesfromthecenterlineofthetopmostpurlintotheouteredgeofthe
selectedarea.

OffsetsFixed

Ifoneoftheseoptionsisactivated,theselecteddistancesarealsokeptinthegrid;
otherwisetheyarecentered.

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheBorderLines
tab.
Name

Description

CutLines

Cuttingedgescanbeaddedsubsequentlytopermitthecreationofnonrectangular
purlincoursesaswell.
Clickthisbuttontoaddacuttingedge.Then,youarepromptedforaborderlinetobe
clickedortobedefinedby2points.Allpurlinsintersectionthisedgearedividedatthe
edgewiththedistancespecifiedintheCutWidthinputfield.
Clickonthisbuttontoremoveaselectedcuttingedge.

PolyCut

Apartfromcuttingedges,itisalsopossibletoaddsectionsforlightdomesorsimilar
things.Theprocedureisthesameasforsections;theonlydifferenceisthatyouhaveto
clickonapolylinehere.

182

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate Connections


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingthePurlins

Name

Description
Clickonthisbuttontoaddanothersection.

Clickonthisbuttontoremoveasection.

Hint:Asarule,aftercreatingapurlinyoushoulddeletetheyellowobjectthat

insertsinthemodel.Thisisusedtomodifythepurlin.
Ifbychanceyouleavethisobjectinthemodelandmodifyoneofthe
shapesthatisapartofthepurlinseparatefromtheotherelementsand
thepurlinandthengobacklaterandmodifythepurlinitselftheone
elementpreviouslymodifiedwillbereplacedbytheshapedefinedin
thepurlin.Thisholdstrueforall"ProSteelStructuralObjects".
6

SelectShapesfromthelistandsettheparametersasshownbelow:

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheShapestab.

Mar-12
Connections

Name

Description

ShapesHeadings

Thisallowsyoutoselectthedesiredshape(ShapeClass,ShapeSize,ShapeType).All
shapesareavailableforselection.

Position

Indicatestheinsertionpositionofthegirdersrelatedtotheinsertionaxis.

Rotation

Specifiestherotationoftheshapesaroundtheinsertionaxis.

Resolution

ProvidesoptionsLow,Normal,High

183

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating the Purlins

Youwillnowaddthepurlinconnections.
7

SelectthePurlinConnectioniconfromtheConnectionstoolbarand,when
prompted,selectallofthepurlinsandrightclicktoaccept.Selectthetwo
beamsthepurlinsconnecttoandrightclicktoaccept.

ThePurlinConnectiondialogisdisplayed.Settheparametersasshown
below.

SelectOKtofinishthecommand.

Exercise:CreatingthePurlins(FloorBeams)

Inthisexercise,youwillcreatethePurlinsFloorBeams.Youwillnowusethe
PurlincommandtoaddfloorbeamstothetopofFR1.
1

SelectthePurlincommand.

WhenpromptedtoSpecifylowerleftedge,selecttheshapeinsteadofthe
twocorners.

WhenpromptedtoSelectdesiredshape,selectthebeambetween
columnsA1andB1.ThenwhenpromptedtoSelectanotherdesired
shape,selectthebeambetweencolumnsA2andB2.
ThePurlindialogisdisplayedsoyoucanmodifytheparametersif
required.

HighlightDimensionsandsettheparametersasshownbelow.

184

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate Connections


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingthePurlins

HighlightShapesandsettheparametersasshownbelow,thenpressOK.

Theresultisthatthefloorbeamsareinsertedtothespacingenteredand
theshearplateconnectionsareautomaticallyaddedaccordingtothe
templateselected.
WewillnowinsertaUB356x171x51beamatthemidpointofthebeams
betweencolumnsA1B1andA2B2.

Mar-12
Connections

SelecttheProSteelShapesiconandsettoUB356x171x51shape.

Inserttheshapeusingthe2pointsmethod.WhenpromptedtoSpecify
theshapestartpoint,selectthemidpointofthebeambetweenA1A2.
WhenpromptedtoSpecifytheshapeendpoint,selectthemidpointof
thebeambetweencolumnsB1B2.ThenselectOK.

185

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating the Purlins

Exercise:CreatetheCopeandShearPlateConnection
Wewillnowcreatetemplatesforthecopeandshearplateconnection.The
first(Cope)willbecalledwithinthesecond(Shearplateconnection),which
wewillcallwithinthePurlindistributiondialog.
1

FromtheProSteelmenu,selectModify.

SelectEnablestoCopeoneShapeonanother.
ThepromptSelectsecondShapetoCopedisplays.

Selectanyofthe310UB32purlinshapesjustinserted.
ThepromptSelectshapeonwhichtocutdisplays.

Selectthe530UB82shapelocatedonAxis1.

186

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate Connections


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingthePurlins

TheProSteelCopedialogappears.

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheStructuralCope
dialog.
Layout

Thisallowsyoutoselecttheshapeofthenotch.Thedifferentvariantsare
shown:
Ontheupperleft,theinitialsituationbeforenotchingisshown(theshapes
arestilloverlapping),andontheupperrightyouseetheContour.
Picturesbelowfromlefttoright:FitShapeStart(thenormalnotch),Fit
ShapeMiddleandFitShapeEnd.

CornerLayout

Edge:Thenotchesattheshaperadiiarecarriedoutwithabevelededge.
Radial:Thenotchesattheshaperadiiarecarriedoutwithadaptedradii.
Radius:Inthisinputfield,thedeterminedradiuscanbemodifiedlater.
AccessHole:Holesaredrilledintheinnercornersofthenotch.IntheRadius
inputfield,theradiusofthedrillholescanbepreset.

Mar-12
Connections

187

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating the Purlins

Align

IfFromInnerFlangeisset,thedimensionsrefertotheinsideoftheflanges.
Otherwise,thedimensionsforthedistancebetweentopandbottomflange
insiderefertotheoutsideoftheflanges.
IfFromCenterisset,thedimensionsrefertotheendoftheshape(theexact
positiondependsonthevalueintheWebDistancefield).Otherwise,the
dimensionsforthedistancebetweentopandbottomflangeedgereferto
theoutsideoftheflanges.

Distance

AllowsyoutosetdistancesfortheTopFlangeInside,BottomFlangeInside,
TopFlangeEdge,BottomFlangeEdge,TopFlangeOutside,BottomFlange
Outside,theWebDistanceandthedrillRadius.

GetFlange
Thickness

Allowsanunknownshapetobeselected.Theflangethicknessisthen
enteredintheinputfieldsforTopandBottomFlange.Ifyouhaveentereda
valueinthe+Distancefield,thisvaluewillbeadded.Usingthisfunction,a
flangedistancecanbeswiftlydeterminedwithoutknowingtheshape.As
reference,youshouldselectthesettingOuterEdge.

ListofCopes

IntheDatatab,alistofpreviouslydefinedcopesisdisplayedfroma
database.ThesedatabasefilescanbecreatedbymeansofanyDBASE
editor.Thus,youcanpreviouslydefineaselectionofthemostfrequent
copes.Inthedifferentlistfieldsyoucanseethebasicdataofthelinkageand
loadtherequiredcopebyselectinganentry.

Youwillnowsavethecopejustcreatedasatemplatesoitcanberecalled
later.
5

SelectTemplateatthebottomoftheCopedialog.

CreateanewfoldernamedTraining.

AddanewcopetotheTrainingfolder.

TypeType1intheNamefield.

Clickthecheckmark.
Thecopesettingsaresavedasatemplate.

10 PressEnter.

188

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate Connections


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingthePurlins

TheCopedialogisreturned.
Youwillnowdeletethecopefromthebeam.
11 Selectthecoped310UB32beam.
12 Rightclick.

13 SelectPS3DDeleteConnectionfromthecontextmenu.

TheDeletionconfirmationdialogboxappears.

14 Clickthecheckmarktoconfirmthedeletionofthecope.

Youwillnowcreateashearplateconnection,saveitasatemplate,andthen
deletetheconnection.
15 UsingtheShearplateconnection,selectanyofthepreviouslyinserted

purlins.
16 Selectthesupporting530UB82beam.

TheProSteelShearplateconnectiondialogappears.

Mar-12
Connections

189

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating the Purlins

17 Settheparametersasshownbelow.

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheShapestab.
ShapeSelection

Thickness:thethicknessofthewebplate
CutPlate:Ifset,theplateiscutattheconnectingshapeincaseofbeveled
shapestobeconnected.
NormaltoCutPlane:Ifset,theplateisnotinsertedinshapedirectionat
beveledconnectingshapesbutalwaysperpendiculartowardsthe
connectingshape.
UsePolyplates:Polyplatesareinsertedinsteadofflats.

Position
selection

Position:Specifythewebsideoftheshapetobeconnected(leftorright),
whichistobeusedforattachingthewebplate.IfBothisselected,aplateis
attachedtobothsidesoftheweb.
FromEdge:Ifset,theverticaloffsetismeasuredfromupperedgeshapeto
upperedgewebplate.
LowerEdge:Ifset,theverticaloffsetreferstotheloweredgeofshapeand
webplate.
UptoFirstBolt:Ifset,theverticaloffsetdoesnotrefertotheedgesofthe
webplatebuttothecenterofthefirstdrillhole.
Gap:Enterthedistancetobeadheredtofromtheouteredgeofthesupport
shapetotheouteredgeoftheshapetobeconnected.
VerticalOffset:Enterthedistanceoftheoffsetforthewebplatefromthe
axisoftheshapetobeconnectedtowardstoportotheright(dependingon
position).Negativevaluesaffectanoppositeoffset.

18 SelecttheDistancetab.

190

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate Connections


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingthePurlins

19 Settheparametersasshownbelow.

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheDistancetab.
Distribution
ShapeDirection

Number:numberofdrillholesinshapedirection
SlotLength:lengthoftheslot
EndOffsetinside:distanceofthelastcenterofadrillholetotheendofthe
webplateonthesideoftheconnectingshape
ConnectionEdge:distanceofthelastdrillholetotheendoftheconnecting
shapeonthesideofthesupportshape
DistanceBetween:distancebetweentwodrillholesinthedirectionofthe
connectingshape

Distribution
CrossDirection

Number:numberofdrillholesintransversalshapedirection
EdgeDistance:distanceofthedrillholestotheouteredgeofthewebplate
DistanceBetween:distancesbetweentwodrillholesinthetransversal
directionoftheconnectingshape

20 SelecttheConnecttab.
21 Settheparametersasshownbelow.

Mar-12
Connections

191

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating the Purlins

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheConnecttab.
BoltSettings

BoltStyle:Selecttheboltstyle(e.g.A325FIELD)fortheconnectioninthe
list.
Dia.:Specifytheboltdiameterfortheconnection.
Workloose:Enterthedesiredclearanceoftheboltedconnection,usually1/
16".

BoltStyleAdd/Edit:edittheboltstyleorcreateanewone.
WeldSettings

WeldStyle:Specifiesthekindofweldseam

WeldStyleAdd/Edit:edittheweldstyleorcreateanewone.
WeldConnect/SupportShapeSide:Specifywhichseamsaretobecreatedin
themodelusingtheoptionWeldFlangeSideorWeldWebSide.The
Thicknessofthedifferentweldseamsisspecifiedinthecorrespondinginput
fields.

192

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate Connections


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingthePurlins

22 SelecttheCopetab.
23 Settheparametersasshownbelow.

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheCopetab.

Mar-12
Connections

Cope

Ifset,youcaneitherselectanalreadystorednotchvariantorenterthedata
directlyusingtheicon.

Cope
Connection
Shape

Specifyhowtheconnectingshapehastobenotched.YoucanselectTop
doublesidedorBottomdoublesided.

Gap

DefinethenecessarygapdistanceforthenotchintheGapfield.

193

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating the Purlins

24 SelecttheGrouptab.
25 Settheparametersasshownbelow.

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheGrouptab.
CreateGroup

Ifset,atinsertionoftheshearplateconnection,theinsertedpartsare
automaticallyassignedtoaconstructiongroupwhichiscreated.

WithBolts/
Weldment

Ifset,theboltsandweldseamsarealsoaddedtothatgroup.

CreateaGroup
ofeachPlate

Ifset,anindividualconstructiongroupiscreatedforeachinsertedshear
plate.

Note:RemembertogothroughtheAssignmenttabtoassignalltheproper

informationtotheplateproperties.
26 Clickthecheckmark.

Exercise:AddtheShearPlateTemplateAutomaticallytoAllthePurlins
Inthisexercise,youwillcreateatemplateasyoudidfortheCopeanddelete
theconnectioninthesameway.
1

Selecttheyellow"X"(parametricline)thatappearedonthepurlinsT.O.S.
youcreatedontopoftheBentleyWorkframe.
Acontextmenuappears.

RightclickonPS3DProperties.

SelecttheConnectionspage.

194

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate Connections


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingthePurlins

Settheparametersasshownbelow.

Thefloorbeamsareinsertedtothespacingenteredandtheshearplate
connectionsareautomaticallyaddedaccordingtothetemplateselected,
whichincludesthecopetemplate.

Exercise:DividethePurlinsinHalfwithaNewSupportBeam
Inthisexercise,youwillusetheDivideoptionfromtheManipulatesubmenu
toseparatethepurlinsintomultiplepiecesandreadytheintersectionsfor
jointdetailing.
1

FromtheProSteel3Dmenu,selectZoom/Views>IsometricOverview.

Youwillnowinserta360UB45beamatthemidpointofthe530UB82beams
betweencolumnsA1andB1,andA2andB2.
2

SelectProSteelShapes.

Setto360UB45shape.

Inserttheshapeusingthe2pointsmethod.

SelectthemidpointofthebeambetweenA1andB1.

SelectthemidpointofthebeambetweencolumnsA2andB2.

ClickOK.

SelectChooseView.
TheChooseViewdialogopens.

SelecttheFR1_TOPview.

10 SelectSetView.

Theviewaresettotheupperframeofthestructure.

Mar-12
Connections

195

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating the Purlins

11 Settheparametersasshownbelow.

Thefloorbeamsareinsertedtothespacingenteredandtheshearplate
connectionsareautomaticallyaddedaccordingtothetemplateselected,
whichincludesthecopetemplate.

Exercise:DividethePurlinsinHalfwithaNewSupportBeam
Inthisexercise,youwillusetheDivideoptionfromtheManipulatesubmenu
toseparatethepurlinsintomultiplepiecesandreadytheintersectionsfor
jointdetailing.
1

FromtheProSteel3Dmenu,selectZoom/Views>IsometricOverview.

Youwillnowinserta360UB45beamatthemidpointofthe530UB82beams
betweencolumnsA1andB1,andA2andB2.
2

SelectProSteelShapes.

Setto360UB45shape.

Inserttheshapeusingthe2pointsmethod.

SelectthemidpointofthebeambetweenA1andB1.

SelectthemidpointofthebeambetweencolumnsA2andB2.

ClickOK.

SelectChooseView.
TheChooseViewdialogopens.

SelecttheFR1_TOPview.

10 SelectSetView.

Theviewaresettotheupperframeofthestructure.

196

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate Connections


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingthePurlins

11 FromtheProSteel3Dmenu,selectManipulate>Divide.

ThepromptSelecttheShapestobeDivideddisplays.
12 Selectall310UB32beamsaddedinthesecondpurlinexercise.
13 Rightclick.

Theselectionsareentered,andthepromptPickDividingPoint<Point>,
Lineappears.
Note:Tobeabletoselectmultipleshapesformodification,theMultiple

ObjectSelectionoptionforthetypeofmanipulationyouareperforming
mustbeenabledintheOptionstaboftheElementModificationdialog
(fromtheProSteel3Dmenu,selectManipulate>Dialog).
14 Clickontheendofthe360UB45beamontheupperframe.

The310UB32shapesaredividedwheretheycrossthe360UB45shape.
15 Clickthecheckmark.

Mar-12
Connections

197

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Coping the Beam and Adding Web Angle Connections

CopingtheBeamandAddingWebAngleConnections

Exercise:CopingtheUB356X171x51Beam

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtocopetheW8x18beamatthebeamsinAxis
AandB.
1

Zoomtoanisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewIcon).Windowinon
theareawheretheUB356x171x51beamintersectstheupper
UB533x210x101beam.

Copethebeams(clickModifyIcon).

Whenpromptedto:PickthesecondShapetoCope,pickthe
UB356x171x51shape.

198

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate Connections


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CopingtheBeamandAddingWebAngleConnections

Whenpromptedto:Selectshapeonwhichtocut:,pickthe
UB533x210x101shapelocatedonAxisB.
TheProSteelCopedialogwillappear.
ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheStructural
Copedialog.

Name

Description

Layout

Thisallowsyoutoselecttheshapeofthenotch.Thedifferentvariantsareshown:On
theupperleft,theinitialsituationbeforenotchingisshown(theshapesarestill
overlapping),andontheupperrightyouseetheContour.Picturesbelowfromleftto
right:FitShapeStart(thenormalnotch),FitShapeMiddleandFitShapeEnd.

CornerLayout

Edgemeansthatthenotchesattheshaperadiiarecarriedoutwithabevelededge.
Radialmeansthatthenotchesattheshaperadiiarecarriedoutwithadaptedradii.In
theRadiusinputfield,thedeterminedradiuscanbemodifiedlater.
AccessHolemeansthatholesaredrilledintheinnercornersofthenotch.IntheRadius
inputfield,theradiusofthedrillholescanbepreset.

Align

IfFromInnerEdgeisactivated,thedimensionsrefertotheinsideoftheflanges.
Otherwise,thedimensionsforthedistancebetweentopandbottomflangeinsiderefer
totheoutsideoftheflanges.
IfFromCenterisactivated,thedimensionsrefertotheendoftheshape(theexact
positiondependsonthe'webdistance'value).Otherwise,thedimensionsforthe
distancebetweentopandbottomflangeedgerefertotheoutsideoftheflanges.

Mar-12
Connections

Distance

AllowsyoutosetdistancesfortheTopFlangeInside,BottomFlangeInside,TopFlange
Edge,BottomFlangeEdge,TopFlangeOutside,BottomFlangeOutside,theWeb
DistanceandthedrillRadius.

GetFlange
Thickness

Pressingthisbuttonallowsanunknownshapetobeclicked.Theflangethicknessis
thenenteredintheinputfieldsforTopandBottomFlange.Ifyouhaveenteredavalue
inthe+Distancefield,thisvaluewillbeadded.Usingthisfunction,aflangedistancecan
beswiftlydeterminedwithoutknowingtheshape.Asreference,youshouldselectthe
settingOuterEdge.

ListofCopes

IntheDatatab,alistofpreviouslydefinedcopesisdisplayedfromadatabase.These
databasefilescanbecreatedbymeansofanyDBASEeditor.Thus,youcanpreviously
defineaselectionofthemostfrequentcopes.Inthedifferentlistfieldsyoucanseethe
basicdataofthelinkageandloadtherequiredcopebyclickingonanentry.

BeforeexitingtheCopedialog,savethecopejustcreatedasatemplateso
itcanberecalledlater.

PresstheTemplatebuttonatthebottomoftheCopedialogtodisplaythe
dialogshownbelow.

199

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Coping the Beam and Adding Web Angle Connections

Createanewfoldernamed"StructCopes",thenaddanewcopetothis.In
theNamefieldtypethenameCope1.NextpresstheSavebuttontosave
thesecopesettingsasatemplate.PressEntertoreturntotheCope
dialog.

200

Purlin Courses, Web Angles and Shear Plate Connections


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

StructuralElements
ModuleOverview
Inadditiontoallofthedescribedconstructiontools,ProSteelenablesthe
generationofrepeatedlyoccurringstandardconstructioninparameterizedform
thesocalledstructuralobjects.Thesearepredesignedsmallconstruction
sections,suchashandrails,stairs,orhangarframes,whichyoucanmodifyto
yourownrequirements.
Thestructuralobjectsaregeneratedbytheprogramaccordingtoprespecified,
adjustableconstructionmethodsifthesecorrespondwithyourrequirements
youcangenerateanentirehandrail.AlthoughthisisanewMicroStationelement,
youcanlateraccesseachandeveryindividualbuildingcomponent,andadapt
andmodifyitindividuallyusingtheProSteelstandardfunctions.
Note: Whenworkingwithstructuralobjects,youshouldrememberthatthese

individualchangesarelostifyousubsequentlymodifythestructuralobject
usingthedialogbox.Thereasonforthisisthat,inthecaseofstructural
objects,onlythedialogparametersaresaved,notyoursubsequentdialog
independentmodifications.

ModulePrerequisites

Mar-12

BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigationetc.

Previousexperiencewitha3DCADsystem,preferablyMicroStationV8i

Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended

201
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Structural Elements

Module Objectives

ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:

Usethehandrailfunctionality

Createstairs

Usetheladderandframestructuralelements

Createcustomworkframes

Structural Elements

202

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingtheHandrail

CreatingtheHandrail
Inthislesson,youwilllearnhowtopreparethemodelforcreationofahandrail;
createthehandrail;andattachthehandrailtoyourstructure.

Exercise:PreparingtheModelfortheHandrail

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtosettheACStotheproperplaneforthe
creationofthehandrailanddrawtheLineStringneededtoconstructthe
handrail.

Zoomtoanisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).

ResettheACStoglobal.

StarttheMicroStationPlaceSmartLinecommandandplacealinearound
theupperareaofframeFR1.

Exercise:CreatingtheHandrail
1

PresstheHandrailiconontheStructuralElementstoolbar.

Whenpromptedto:SelectSmartLine,picktheSmartLineyoucreatedin
thepreviousexercise.
ThiswilldisplaytheProSteelHandraildialog.

SettheparametersintheDimensionstabasshownbelow.

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheDimensionstab.

Mar-12

203

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Structural Elements

Creating the Handrail

Name

Description

Connection
Height

ThedistancebetweenthedrawnSmartLineandthebeginningofthepostsincluding
possiblefasteningplate.

RailingHeight

Thedistanceoftheupperedgeofthenewelpostsorthecenteroftherailinghead(ifin
place)measuredperpendiculartotheSmartLine.
UpperRailHeight:Thecenterdistanceoftheupperkneehighrail(ifinplace)
measuredperpendiculartotheSmartLine.
MidRailHeight:Thecenterdistanceofthemiddlekneehighrail(ifinplace)measured
perpendiculartotheSmartLine.
LowerRailHeight:Thecenterdistanceofthelowerkneehighrail(ifinplace)measured
perpendiculartotheSmartLine.

HandRailRadius

Radiusoftherailingheadatthecornersofthehandrail.Ifaradiusisspecifiedthe
correspondingshapebendsareapplied;otherwiseamiteredjointiscut.

KneeRailRadius

Radiusofthekneehighguardrailatthecornersofthehandrail.Ifaradiusisspecified
thecorrespondingshapebendsareapplied;otherwiseamiteredjointiscut.

KickPlateRadius

Radiusofthebaseboardatthecornersofthehandrail.Ifaradiusisspecifiedthe
correspondingshapebendsareapplied;otherwiseamiteredjointiscut.

PostDistance

TheapproximatespacingoftherailpostswithintheindividualSmartLinesegments.
Dependingonthesetting,theprogramusesthisinformationtospaceoutthenewel
postsinregularintervalsandroundsthevalueupordownasneeded.

Maximum

Ifthisfieldisenabled,thepostdistancesareregardedasthemaximumvalue.If
necessaryadditionalpostsareinserted.

EdgeOffset

Thespacingofthecornerpostsbetweentwohandrailsegmentsstartingwiththe
intersectionoftheSmartLinesegments.

Min.Segment
Length

EntertheminimumDistanceforatleastonepost.

Min.seg.2posts

EntertheminimumDistancefortwoposts.

StartOffset

Projectionofthekneehighguardrailsandtherailingheadstartingfromthemiddleof
thefirstrailposttowardstheoutside.

EndOffset

Projectionofthekneehighguardrailsandtherailingheadstartingfromthemiddleof
thelastrailposttowardstheoutside.

ConnectSphere
Dia.

Entertheradiusofthickeningattheintersectionpointsbetweenthepostsande.g.the
kneehighguardrails.

Structural Elements

204

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingtheHandrail

Name

Description

Dynamic

Ifthisfieldisenabled,youcanmonitorthesettingsimmediatelyonscreen.

DrawDiagonal

Ifthisfieldisenabled,adiagonaloftheactualstructuralelementisdrawninthe
differentsegmentstosupportaneasierselection.

SelectPostDistribution.Settheparametersasshownbelow:

Mar-12

SelectShapes.Settheparametersasshownbelow.Youwillselectseveral
differentshapeclasses.

205

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Structural Elements

Creating the Handrail

IntheShapestabyoucanselecttheprofilesfortheindividualsectionsofthe
handrail.SelectahandrailoptionfromtheShapeClasslist,thensetthedesired

Structural Elements

206

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingtheHandrail

parametersforthatoption.OnlyShapeClassoptionsthathavebeendefinedwill
beplacedinthemodel.
TheAngleandMirroroptionsallowyoutorotatetheshapesofthedifferentparts
ofthehandrailaroundtheirinsertionaxis.Thisisofgreatimportancein
combinationwithunsymmetricalshapes.SettherotationAngletoeither0,90,
180or270forthecorrespondingpartofthehandrailandchecktheMirrorfield
iftheshapehastobemirrored.

Youcanaddakickplatetothehandrail.TheoptionsintheKickPlatetab,
however,willonlybeactivatediftheKickPlateoptionhasbeendefinedinthe
Shapestab.Theremainingfieldsaredescribedinthefollowingtable.

Name

Description

OtherSide

Ifthisfieldisenabled,thebaseboardwillbeinsertedattheothersideoftherailing
posts.

SideOffset

Thisallowsyoutospecifythedistanceofouteredgeofrailingpostandinneredgeof
baseboard.Thispermitsyoutokeepsomespaceforindividualfasteningsorgrouts.

HeightOffset

Thedistancebetweenthedrawnpolylineandtheloweredgeofbaseboard.Negative
valueswillmovethebaseboardtowardsthebottom.

IntheLayoutandPositionlist,youselectthefasteningofthehandrailposts.If
Noneisselected,nofasteningwillbeprovided.IfVerticalisselected,theplates

Mar-12

207

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Structural Elements

Creating the Handrail

willbeperpendiculartothepost.IfLateralisselected,platesorbentconnections
willbeweldedtotheoutsideofthepost.

Structural Elements

208

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingtheStairs

CreatingtheStairs

Exercise:CreatingtheStair

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtocreatetheStairelementandmodifyits
settings.
1

Movetoanisometricview(ProSteelmenu>Zoom/Views>Isometric
Overview).

SetACStoglobal.

PresstheStairsiconontheStructuralElementstoolbarorgotoProSteel
menu>StructuralObjects>Stairs.

Whenpromptedto:SpecifystartpointoftheStairs,typeintheabsolute
coordinatesX,Y,Z.

Whenpromptedto:Specifystairdirection,pickapointtotheleftofthe
insertionpoint.

ThiswilldisplaytheProSteelStairdialog.Settheparametersasshown
below.

DescriptionsofthefieldsintheProSteelStairdialogareprovidedinthe
tablebelow.

Mar-12

Name

Description

Width

Thewidthofthestaircaseacrossoutersteeledge.

Length

Entirelengthofthestairconstruction.

209

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Structural Elements

Creating the Stairs

Name

Description

Height

Theheightofthestaircasefromstartingpointtostairheadincludinggridiron.

Riser

Thedesiredriseofthestaircasesteps.

RiserCount

Theresultingnumberofsteps.

Angle

Theresultinggradientofthestaircase.

Going

Theresultingexacttreaddepthofthesteps.Thisvaluecan,however,alsobe
determinedbeforeandtheconstructionwillbecalculatedanewaccordingtothis
value.

ActualRise

Theresultingexactriseofthesteps.Thisvaluecan,however,alsobedetermined
beforeandtheconstructionwillbecalculatedanewaccordingtothisvalue.

Upperinsert
point

Ifthisfieldischecked,theinsertionpointissituatedontheuppersideofthestaircase
insteadofthebottomside(anditisextendedtowardsthebottom).

Dynamic

Ifthisfieldisenabled,youcanmonitorthesettingsimmediatelyonscreen.

Template

Allowsyoutonameandsavethesettingsforlateruse.

SelectBasis,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:

Structural Elements

210

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingtheStairs

Name

Description

LowerLanding
Length

Lengthofthelowerstairhead.Tocreatethestairhead,youhavetochecktheinput
fieldinfrontofit.Otherwise,thestaircasecheeksarecutatthebasicplaneandthe
stairheadisomitted.

US_Definition

IftheUSDefinitionfieldhasbeencheckedadditionally,thestairheadlengthsare
definedaccordingtoUSstandards.

UpperLanding
Length

Lengthoftheupperstairbase.

Stairfootlength

EnterthelengthoftheStaircasefoot.

Verticalsection

Allowsyoutoenteraverticalcutfromthefrontedgeofthestaircasecheek.Thisfieldis
onlyavailablewhenyoudidn'tspecifyalengthofstaircasefoot(i.e.thestaircasecheek
isdirectlyrunningintothefloorlevel.)

Grounddistance

Allowsyoutoenteragapbetweenstaircasefootandfloorleveltohaveroome.g.for
anadditionalconstructionorforfoundations.Thisfieldisonlyavailablewhenyou
didn'tspecifyalengthofstaircasefoot(i.e.thestaircasecheekisdirectlyrunninginto
thefloorlevel.)

WebGrating
Thickness

Heightoftheattachedgridirons.

SideOffset

Theprojectionoftheattachedgridironsbeyondtheouteredgeofthestaircase
construction.Negativevaluesdecreasethedimensionofgridirons.

SelectPlatforms,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:

Mar-12

211

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Structural Elements

Creating the Stairs

Name

Description

No.ofplatforms

Enterthenumberoffloors(intermediatestairheads).

InnerDistance

Enterthemeasurebetweentwostaircases(includingcheekshapes)iftheintermediate
stairheadsarestairheadsforchangeover.

PlatformNo.

Selecttheflooryouwanttoprocess.

Length

Lengthofthecurrentplatform.

Height

Heightofthecurrentplatform.

LowerLanding
Length

Lengthofthelowerlandingofthecurrentplatform.

UpperLanding
Length

Lengthoftheupperlandingofthecurrentplatform.

AngletoPrevious Ifyouenterananglehere,youcancreatethebentrunningofthestaircaseorstair
Platform
headsforchangeover(180).Negativevaluescreateanoppositesenseofrotation.

SelectShapes,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:

10 SelecttheBoltspage,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:

Structural Elements

212

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingtheStairs

Name

Description

ShapeClass/Size/ Allowsyoutoselecttheshapesforthestairandstairheadercheeks.
Type/Resolution
DrillStringer

Ifthisfieldisenabled,thestaircheeksaredrilledtopermitboltingthestepsorthe
handrail.

BoltHandrailto
Stringer

Ifthisfieldisenabled,thecheeksandthehandrailareboltedifahandrailexists.
Selecttherequiredbolttypeintheselectionlist.

BoltTreadto
Stringer

Ifthisfieldisenabled,thestepsandcheeksarebolted.Selecttherequiredbolttypein
theselectionlist.

11 SelectTreads,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:

Mar-12

213

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Structural Elements

Creating the Stairs

Name

Description

CreateTreads

Ifthisfieldisenabled,thestairstepsaregenerated.

StepType

Provides(3)optionsStandardSteps,TreadsBuiltfromShapesandBlocksteps.
TreadsBuiltfromShapesIfthisfieldisenabled,thestepsaregeneratedfromshapes
insteadofasDINsteps.Intheselectionlistsyoucanselecttherequiredshapeasusual.
Allshapesareavailableforselection.

Increment

Thedepthofthestaircasesteps.

b,d,c

Distancesforthemountingholesofthestaircasesteps.
"b"isthedistanceoftheholesfromtheupperedgeofthesteps,"c"istheheightofthe
fasteningofstaircasesteps,"d"istheholespacingofbothmountingholes.

HoleSpacing

Thespacingofthesteps'mountingholes.

HoleDia.

Theholediameterofthesteps'mountingholes.

SlotLength

Thedistanceoftheaxesoftherearoblongstephole.

Offset

Theoffsetofthestaircasestepsfromthefrontedgeofthestaircasetotheback.
Negativevaluesmovethestepstothefront.

Note: ThetypeofstepthatisselectedfromtheStepTypelistcontrolswhichsetof

parametersaredisplayedintheTreadstab.Moreinformationonthe
parametersforthedifferentsteptypescanbeaccessedfromtheProSteel
help.
12 SelectHandrail,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:

Structural Elements

214

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingtheStairs

Name

Description

CreateHandrails

Ifthisfieldisenabled,ahandrailisaddedtothestaircase.

Handrail
Connection

Allowsyoutospecifytheboltingofhandrailandstaircasecheek.
Automatic:Theprogramtriestodeterminethemostsuitablefastening.
Vertical:Thehandrailisalwaysboltonthestaircasecheekfromabove,independently
ofthesettingsintheusedhandrailtemplate.
BySide:Thehandrailisalwaysboltlaterallyonthestaircasecheek,independentlyof
thesettingsintheusedhandrailtemplate.
Individual:Thesettingsinthehandrailtemplateareused.

Mar-12

StartOffset

Allowsyoutoenteranoffsetvaluethatmovesthestartofthehandrailfromthefront
edgeofthestaircasetotheback.Negativevaluesmovethehandrailtothefront.In
caseofstaircaseswithoutbasicstairhead,youcanthusmovethestartofthehandrail
toapositionwhereaboltmountingispossible.

EndOffset

Analogouslytostartoffset,youenterhereanoffsetvaluefortheendofthehandrail.

SideOffset

Allowsyoutoenteranoffsetvaluethatmovesthehandrailfromtheouteredgeofthe
staircasetotheoutside.Thispermitsyoutomountthehandrailoutsidethestaircase
onothershapesoronthewall.

HeightOffset

Allowsyoutoenteranoffsetvaluethatmovesthehandrailfromtheupperedgeofthe
staircasecheektothetop.Thispermitsyoutoattachagroutoranindividualfastening.

SideOffset

Ifyouenteravaluebiggerthan0inthisinputfield,averticalconnectingplateis
insertedbetweenplateandstaircasecheekincaseoflateralmounting.

215

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Structural Elements

Creating the Stairs

Name

Description

Handrail
Template

Selectthetemplatetobeusedforthehandrailintheselectionlist.Thistemplate
describestheexactstructure.Thehandrailtemplatesarecreatedbymeansofthe
structuralelement'Handrail'andthetemplatefunction.

HandrailSettings Byclickingthisbutton,youcanpresetthehandrailstructure(shapes,distances,etc.)or
edittheusedhandrailtemplates.Anotherdialogopenswhichisidenticalwiththe
'Handrail'structureobject.Thusyoucanrefertothisdialogforfurtherinformation.

13 Next,clickontheWorkFrametab.
Hint: AseparateWorkFramecanbecreatedshowingadirectoverviewonthe

staircasetoallowforbetterworkingatthestaircasewithintheboundsofa
biggerconstruction.ByclickingthefieldsFrontView,LateralViewLeft,Lateral
ViewRightorTopView,youcancreatethecorrespondingworkingframe.You
canenterthegeneralnameoftheworkframeintheGroupNamefield.Ifyou
enteravalueintheEdgeDistancefield,thesizeofthedifferentframesis
decreased.Thus,youcanbetterselectframesthatarelyingnexttoeachother.
14 PressOKtoclosetheProSteelStairdialog.

Themodelshouldlooklikethefigurebelow.

Structural Elements

216

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingtheStairs

Mar-12

217

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Structural Elements

Ladder and Frame Structural Elements

LadderandFrameStructuralElements
Inthislesson,youwilllearnhowtodothefollowing:

Createaladder

Createaframe

Createacustomworkframefordetailing

Exercise:CreatingaLadder

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtocreatetheLadderelementandmodifyits
settings.
1

Startanewmodel(Filemenu>New).StartwiththeseedfileProSteelV8i
Metric.dgn.Nameit"TRNMODEL2.DGN".

SelecttheLaddersiconfromtheStructuralElementstoolbar.
Theprompt:Specifyleftinsertionpointofladderdisplays.

Pickapointinthemodel.

Whenpromptedto:Specifyrightinsertpointofladder,pickapointtothe
rightofthefirstpoint.

Whenpromptedto:PickaTopPoint(+ALTKey),holddowntheALTkey
andpickapointtowardthetoprighthandcornerofthedrawingarea.
ThiswillopentheProSteelLadderdialog.

SettheparametersforeachtabasshownbelowthenpressOKtoinsert
theladder.

Structural Elements

218

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

LadderandFrameStructuralElements

DescriptionsofthefieldsintheDimensionstaboftheProSteelLadderdialogare
providedinthetablebelow.

Name

Description

Width

Thewidthoftheladderascleardimensionbetweentheuprights.

Height

Theheightoftheladderwithoutpossibleprojectionashelpforclimbingout.

Riser

Thedesireddistancebetweentherungs.Theprogramdividesthedistancesbetween
firstandlastrungregularlyaccordingtothisspecificationandthevalueisroundedup
ordowncorrespondingly.

Actualriser

Theactualresultingdistancebetweentherungsisdisplayed.

DistancetoFloor

Thedistancebetweentheupperedgeofthefirstrungandthegroundareaofthe
ladder.

TopDistance

Thedistancebetweentheupperedgeofthelastrungandtheclimbingoutareaofthe
ladder.

Offset

Theheightofthehelpforclimbingoutrelatedtotheclimbingoutsurfaceoftheladder
(axismeasure).

Stringer

Thedepthofthehelpforclimbingout(axismeasure).

SharpBend

Thefrontjumpinofthehelpforclimbingout(axismeasure),ifithastobecreatedwith
abend.

Dynamic

Ifthisfieldisenabled,youcanmonitorthesettingsimmediatelyonscreen.

DrawDiagonal

Ifthisfieldisenabled,adiagonaloftheactualstructuralelementisdrawnintheladder
tosupportaneasierselection.

FitLadderRung

Ifthisfieldisenabled,theRungsaredisplayedevenifthereisnoShapegiven.

Mar-12

SelectShapes,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:

219

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Structural Elements

Ladder and Frame Structural Elements

DescriptionsofthefieldsintheShapestaboftheProSteelLadderdialogare
providedinthetablebelow.

Name

Description

SelectionLists

Selecttheshapesoftheladderuprightsandrungsasusual.Allshapesareavailablefor
selection.

0,90,180,270

Youcanrotatetheprofilesaroundtheirinsertionaxisherebycheckingtherequired
angle.

Mirror

Ifthisfieldisenabled,theprofilewillbemirroredbeforeinsertion.

SelectWallMounting,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:

Structural Elements

220

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

LadderandFrameStructuralElements

DescriptionsofthefieldsintheWallMountingtaboftheProSteelLadderdialog
areprovidedinthetablebelow.

Name

Description

0,90,180,270

Youcanrotatethewallprofilearounditsinsertionaxisherebycheckingtherequired
angle.

Mirror

Ifthisfieldisenabled,thewallprofilewillbemirroredbeforeinsertion.

Position

Selecttheinsertionpositionofthewallprofile.
InnerEdge:Ifthisfieldisenabled,thewallshapeisinsertedattheinneredgeofthe
uprightandshowstotheinside.
Centrally:Ifthisfieldisenabled,thewallshapeisinsertedinaxispositionontheheight
ofuprightaxis.
OuterEdge:Ifthisfieldisenabled,thewallshapeisinsertedattheouteredgeofthe
uprightandshowstotheoutside.

WallDistance

Thedistancebetweenuprightaxesandwallsurfacewheretheladderhastobe
mounted.

DistancetoFloor

Thedistancebetweentheaxisofthefirstwallprofileandthegroundareaofthe
ladder.

Distance

Thedesireddistanceofthewallprofiles.Theprogramdividesthedistancesbetween
thefirstandlastwallprofileregularlyaccordingtothisspecificationandthevaluesare
roundedupordowncorrespondingly.

TopDistance

Thedistancebetweentheaxisofthelastwallprofileandtheclimbingoutareaofthe
ladder.

Template

Allowsyoutonameandsavethesettingsforlateruse.

Clone

Youcantransmitthedataofanexistingconnectiontothenewconnectionbyclicking
theexistingwebangleconnection.

Mar-12

SelecttheSafetyCagepage,thensettheparametersasshownbelow:

221

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Structural Elements

Ladder and Frame Structural Elements

DescriptionsofthefieldsintheSafetyCagetaboftheProSteelLadderdialogare
providedinthetablebelow.

Name

Description

0,90,180,270

Youcanrotatetheprofilearounditsinsertionaxisherebycheckingtherequiredangle.

Mirror

Ifthisfieldisenabled,thewallprofilewillbemirroredbeforeinsertion.

Position

Selecttheinsertionpositionhowthestiffeningringisconnectedwiththeupright.
InnerEdge:Ifthisfieldisenabled,theconnectionbetweenstiffeningringanduprightis
insertedattheinneredgeoftheuprightandshowstotheinside.
Centered:Ifthisfieldisenabled,theconnectionbetweenstiffeningringanduprightis
insertedinaxispositionontheheightofuprightaxis.
OuterEdge:Ifthisfieldisenabled,theconnectionbetweenstiffeningringandupright
isinsertedattheouteredgeoftheuprightandshowstotheoutside.

Radius

Specifytheradiusofcagestiffeners.

NumberofRungs Specifyhowmanylongitudinalrungsthecagehastoconsistof.Thebarswillbedivided
regularlyontheresultingsemicircle.
LowerRadius

Structural Elements

SetstheInnerradiusofthesafetycageattheloweredge.

222

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

LadderandFrameStructuralElements

Mar-12

Name

Description

LowerDistance

Setsthedistanceofthelowertothenextconnectionofthesafetycage.

Distance

Thedesireddistanceofthestiffeners(rings)ofthesafetycage.Theprogramdividesthe
distancesbetweenthefirstandlastringregularlyaccordingtothisspecificationand
thevaluesareroundedupordowncorrespondingly.

223

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Structural Elements

Creating Custom Workframes (View)

CreatingCustomWorkframes(View)

Exercise:CreatingaCustomFrame(View)

Inthisexerciseyouwilllearnhowtocreateacustomworkframetobeusedby
theChooseViewcommandandforthelateruseinthedetailing.
1

Ifnotalreadyloaded,opentheTRNMODEL.dgnfile.

SelectZoom/Views>ObjectViewCenteredfromtheProSteelmenu.
Theprompt:SelectelementtosetViewto,orRETURNtoaligntheViewis
displayed.

SelectoneofthePurlinsontheawning.

Whenpromptedto:PickdesiredAxis,pickthemagentaaxispointing
upwardsawayfromthemodel.
Nowthatyouhavethedesiredplanedepictedinourmodelyoucanbegin
theprocessofcreatingthecustomview.

Structural Elements

OpentheChooseViewdialog(clickChooseViewicon).

SelecttheCreateNewWorkframebuttonandnamethenewview
AWNING_P.

PressOK,andwhenpromptedto:Selectlowerleftcornerofdesired
window,usethesnapandpickthebottomlefthandcornerofthepurlin.

Whenpromptedto:Selectupperrightedgeofdesiredwindow,picka
pointtotherightandabovethefirstpointtoincludeallofthepurlinsand
thefirstpartofthemountingbeams,similartothefigurebelow.

ThiswillcreatetheviewandreturnyoutotheChooseViewdialog.Press
theCancelbuttontoendtheprocess.

224

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingCustomWorkframes(View)

10 Returntoanisometricoverview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).
11 Totest,selectZoom/Views>ChooseView.Whenthedialogappearspick

onyournewlycreatedviewAWNING_PandthenpicktheSetView
button,ordoubleclickontheview.

Mar-12

225

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Structural Elements

Creating Custom Workframes (View)

Structural Elements

226

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Extras
ModuleOverview
ThismodulecontainsinformationoncreatingshapesinProSteel,includinguser
created,standarduser,roofandwallpanels,combinedandweldedshapes.It
alsoexplainsexportingafiletopureAutoCAD,determiningthecenterofgravity,
collisiondetection,andtheunfoldfunction.Usercreatedshapes

ModulePrerequisites

BasicWindowsknowledgeincludingfilenavigation,etc.

Previousexperiencewitha3DCADsystem,preferablyAutoCAD.

Completionofpreviousmodulesinthiscourserecommended.

ModuleObjectives
Aftercompletingthismodule,youwillbeableto:

Mar-12

CreateaprofileusingclosedPolylines.

Usetwoormorenativeshapestocreateacombinedshape.

Createaweldedshape.

ExporttopureAutoCAD.

Calculatethecentreofgravity.

UsetheCollisionDetectionfunctionandtheUnfoldfunction.

227
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Extras

User Created Shapes

UserCreatedShapes
ProSteelprovidesfunctionalitytocreatedifferentuserdefinedshapes.Using
UserShapes,CombinedShapes,RoofandWallPanellingShapesandWelded
Shapes,theusercancreateanyuserdefinableshapesduringaProSteelsession
andusethemonthefly.Theseshapeswillreactinasimilarfashiontonative
ProSteelshapes.
Shapescreatedbytheuserareclassifiedincatalogues(foldersontheharddrive).
Tolearnaboutthesetoolsstartanewdrawingorworkonthesideofthecurrent
model.

Extras

228

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

StandardUserShape

StandardUserShape
UsershapescanbecreatedfromMicroStationLines,openorclosedSmartLines,
withorwithoutinternalislands(withclosedSmartLines).

Mar-12

229

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Extras

Standard User Shape

Exercise:CreateasimilarprofileusingclosedSmartLines

Inthisexercise,youwillcreateafiguresimilartotheimagejustshown,usingone
externalclosedpolylineandtwointernalclosedpolylines.
1

SelectCreateUserShapefromtheProSteelEdittoolbar.

SelectUserShapes.

RightclickandselectCreateanewCatalog.

Extras

Type"Training"intheprovidedfield.

Rightclickonthe"Training"catalogue.

SelectCreateUserShape.

230

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

StandardUserShape

TypeMyFirstUserShapeintheprovidedfieldusinganormalresolution.

RightclickonMyFirstUserShape.

SelectCreateNormalResolution.
Thedialogtemporarilydisappears.

10 SelecttheoutercontourPolyline.
11 Selecttheinnerislands,thenpressEntertwice.

AtthispointtheUserShapeiscreatedandreadytobeusedfromthe
Shapedialog(seebelow).

Mar-12

231

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Extras

Standard User Shape

Extras

232

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

StandardUserShape

Mar-12

233

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Extras

Roof & Wall Panels

Roof&WallPanels
Createasimilarprofile(seeillustration)usingaclosedSmartLine.

TheproceduretocreateRoof&WallPanelShapesisidenticaltotheabove
processtocreateaStandardUserShape.

CombinedShapes
CombinedshapescanbecreatedoutoftwoormorenativeProSteelshapes,user
definedshapesoramixofboth.Createasimilarprofile(seeillustration)using
nativeProSteelshapes.TheshapemustbeverticalinthecurrentACSSystem.
Note: Theshapesusedtocreateacombinedshapeshouldbeinthesameorientation

andtheyshouldnotbemirrored.

Extras

Exercise:Usingtwoormorenativeshapestocreateacombinedshape
1

FromtheProSteelEdittoolbarclickonCreateUserShapeicon.

IntheUserShapeManagertaboftheProSteelUserShapeManager
dialogselectCombinedShapes.

RightclickandselectCreateanewCatalog.

234

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CombinedShapes

Type"Training"intheprovidedfield.

Mar-12

Rightclickonthe"Training"catalogueandselectCreateCombiShape.

Type"MyFirstCombinedShape"intheprovidedfield.Atthispointyou
cancreatethreedifferentrepresentationsforlow,normalandhigh
resolutionsof"MyFirstCombinedShape".Youwillcreateanormal
resolution.

Rightclickonthe"MyFirstCombinedShape"andselectCreateNormal
Resolution.Thedialogwilltemporarilydisappear.

235

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Extras

Combined Shapes

Selectbothsteelshapes(SandC),thenrightclicktwice.TheUserShape
Propertiesdialogwillappear.

Type"MyFirstCombinedShape"intheNamefield.Theoptionally
providedinformationwillappearinthePS3DPropertiesandcanbe
extractedintheBillofMaterials(B.O.M.).

10 CompletethecreationprocessbyclickingtheOkcheckmark.

AtthispointtheCombinedShapeiscreatedandreadytobeusedfrom
theShapedialog(seebelow).

Extras

236

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CombinedShapes

Mar-12

237

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Extras

Combined Shapes

Extras

238

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

WeldedShapes

WeldedShapes
Weldedshapesconsistsofseveralplatesweldedtogethertoformaprofile.Those
platescanbeofdifferentsizesandpositionswithinthecrosssection.Theycanbe
treatedorquantifiedasasingleshapeorasseparateplates.
SimilartonativeProSteelshapes,WeldedShapesarecreatedwithaconstant
crosssectionaldepth/heightandcanbetaperedusingthePS3DProperties.
TwodifferentkindsofWeldedshapesexistinProSteel:IFormweldedshape;and
weldedshapewithanynumberofplates.
IFormWeldedShape.Thisisashapethatismadeupofthreeplatesintheform
ofanIbeam.Thegreatadvantageofthistypeofshapeistheabilitytomodifythe
webplatebyaddingorremovingvertexesusingPS3DPropertiestocreatea
complexform(seebelow)

WeldedShapewithanynumberofplates.Thisshapeisnotlimitedbytheuseof
threeplatesintheshapeofanIbeam.

Mar-12

Exercise:Creatingaweldedshape
1

FromtheProSteelEdittoolbarclickonCreateUserShape.

IntheUserShapeManagertaboftheProSteelUserShapeManager
dialog,selectWeldShapes.

RightclickandselectCreateanewCatalog(seebelow).

Type"Training"intheprovidedfield.

239

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Extras

Welded Shapes

Extras

Rightclickonthe"Training"catalogueandselectCreateWeldshape.

Type"MyFirstWeldedShape"intheprovidedfield.

240

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

WeldedShapes

Atthispointyoucancreatethreedifferentrepresentationsforlow,
normalandhighresolutionsof"MyFirstWeldedShape",youwillcreatea
normalresolution.

Rightclickonthe"MyFirstWeldedShape"andselectCreateNormal
Resolution.ThedialogwilltemporarilydisappearandtheWeldShape
editorwillappear.

ClickonAddanotherElementtotheShapeDefinition.Anewplateis
insertedattheoriginwith0degreerotation.

Enterthesettingsandvaluesasshownbelow.

10 Repeatpreviousoperationthreemoretimesasshownbelow.

Mar-12

241

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Extras

Welded Shapes

11 EndtheprocessbyclickingtheOKcheckmark.TheUserShapeProperties

dialogwillappear.

Extras

242

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

WeldedShapes

12 Type"MyFirstWeldedShape"intheNamefield.Theoptionallyprovided

informationwillappearinthePS3DPropertiesandcanbeextractedinthe
B.O.M.
13 ClosetheUserShapePropertiesdialogbyclickingtheOKcheckmark.

14 ClosetheProSteelUserShapeManagerdialogbyclickingOK.Atthispoint

theWeldedShapeiscreatedandreadytobeusedfromtheShapedialog
(seebelow).

Mar-12

243

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Extras

Export to Pure MicroStation

ExporttoPureMicroStation
YoucanconvertanyProSteelmodelintoapureMicroStationnativefile.Asa
matteroffact,youhavetwooptionstodothis:

ThefirstoneistoconvertaProSteelfile(plan,elevationordetail)intopure
MicroStationlines.UsetheProSteel>2D>CreateNativeDrawingcommand
forthisoption.

ThesecondoptionistoimportaProSteelmodelintoanothersoftwarethat
recognizesMicroStationsolidsbutnotProSteelobjects.UsetheProSteel>2D
>CreateSolidsFilecommandforthisoption.

Thesetwocommandsproduceafilethatisstrictlyforviewingordistributionto
clientsorsubcontractorsthathaveMicroStationbutnotProSteel.The
MicroStationfilecanalsobeusedtocheckthemodel.IntheMicroStationfile,
linesandarcswillbeconvertedintoMicroStationcells.
Note: WhenyouconvertaProSteelmodeltoMicroStation,youloseallProSteel

informationinthecurrentfile.Thisisnota"SAVEAS"procedure.When
exportingaProSteelmodeltoMicroStationworkonacopyofthemodel.

CentreofGravity
Usethisfunctiontocalculatethecentreofgravityofanynumberofselected
parts.(Traditionallythisisusedtodeterminewheretoplaceliftinglugs,finding
outglobalweightandvolume)
Tostart,clickCentreofGravityonProSteel>CollisionDetectiontoolbar,then
selectanynumberofshapes,plates,etc.
Aspherewillbecreatedatthecentreofgravityoftheselectedobjectsand
informationsimilartothefollowingwillappearatthecommandline/textscreen.
ResultingBodyweightinSteelis6084.886
CoordinatesofCenterofGravityareX=8047Y=4700Z=3526
ResultingBodyvolumeis0.774m^3
Note: Differentspecificweightsareignored;thisfunctionconsidersthatallselected

partsaremadeofsteel.

Extras

244

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CollisionDetection

CollisionDetection
ThisfunctionisusedtodetectclashesbetweenProSteelobjects.Itisdesignedto
visuallyinspectanddetectcollisionsincongestedareas;itisnotmeanttoclash
detectamassivestructure.
Tolearnthisfunction,createtwocrossingpipesasshownbelow.

Exercise:UsingtheCollisionDetectionfunction
1

ClickCollisionDetection

onProSteelEdittoolbar.

WhentheCollisionCheckdialogappears,entervaluesasshownbelow.

Click
andselectthenewlycreatedpipes.ProSteelcreatesmagenta
colouredvolumesateachcollision.

Tomovefromonecollisiontoanotherclickon

Toeraseallcollisionvolumesclickon

Mar-12

Minvolume=Clashtoleranceinmm

Displayscaling=Zoomingfactor

Actual/Max=Totalnumberofcollisions

245

or

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Extras

Unfold

Unfold
Thisfunctionisusedtounfold/developanyProSteelshapewithorwithout
modifications(cuts,drills,notchesetc.)ontothecurrent/activeACS.
Tolearnthisfunction,startanewdrawingandcreatesimilarpipewithapolycut
andaBooleansubtractintersectasshownbelow.

Exercise:UsingtheUnfoldfunction
1

ClickonUnfoldfromtheProSteelEdittoolbar.TheProSteelUnfoldPipe
dialogwillappear.Entervaluesandsettingsasshownbelow.

Extras

ClicktheOkcheckmark,thenselectthepartwiththemodification,
subsequentlyplacetheresultanywhereinthemodel.

246

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Unfold

Theresultshouldbeasshownbelow.

Mar-12

247

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Extras

Unfold

Extras

248

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ProSteelV8iMicroStation
DetailingFundamentals

ProSteelV8i

BentleyInstituteCourseGuide

ProSteel V8i AutoCAD Detailing Fundamentals

44

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DetailingFundamentals
Overview
CourseDescription
Afteryouhavecreatedamodel,completedyouredits,positionedallofthe
necessarycomponents,andpossiblyissuedapreliminarypartslist,theFinishing
orDetailingofthe3Dcomponentscancommence.ProSteelgeneratestheusual
2Dviewsofthecomponentsfortheworkshopplansusingthemodel,asfollows:

ProSteelwilldissemblethemodelintoitscomponents,analysethegeometry
ofalltheindividualparts,andascertainanyexistinginvisibleedges.

Then,dependingontherequirementsofyourselections,theshapeis
displayedinseveralviews,dimensioned,andattachedtoapositionflag.

Note: Allofthistakesplaceinasplitsecondandinthebackground.

OnceProSteelhasfinishedwithonecomponent,thiscomponentisdeposited
inalibraryintheformofablock,clearlyorganizedaccordingtotheindividual
constructiongroupsanddesignsections.

Afterthisprocedurehadconcluded,youcanfurtheruseProSteeltohelpyouwith
thelayoutofthepartsonyourdrawingsheets.Fromhereon,youcantreatthe
partsasiftheywerethetypicaldrawingsgeneratedinaCADprogram,although
ProSteelwillofferyouafewextrafunctionstofacilitateyourwork.

TargetAudience
Thiscourseisrecommendedforthefollowingaudience(s):

Mar-12

StructuralDesigner

StructuralEngineer

StructuralEngineeringTechnician

Architect

45
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detailing Fundamentals Overview

Prerequisites

ArchitecturalDesigner

ArchitecturalEngineer

Prerequisites

ExperiencewithMicroStation2D/3Dexperience

ExperiencewithProSteelV8iforMicroStation

CourseObjectives
Aftercompletingthiscourse,youwillbeableto:

Definedifferentuserstylessuchasthebolt,elevationflagorweldflag

UnderstandProSteelgrouping

LearnhowtocreatePartDescriptionsandPartFamiliesforsteelmembersby
categorizingdifferenttypesofcomponents(e.g.,columns,beams,gusset
plates,etc.)

Createandsetstylesfordifferentfinal2Ddrawingtypes

Createcustomized2Ddrawingstylestothecompanystandard

Create2Dplans,elevationsandsectionsfrom3Dmodels

Createsteelsinglememberpartdetails

Createbeamandcolumngroupdetail

ModulesIncluded
Thefollowingmodulesareincludedinthiscourse:

UserDefinedStylesandSymbols

ProSteelGrouping

CreatingandManipulatingPartFamilies,PartDescriptions

PositioningandMaterialTakeOffs

ComponentsRequiredPriorto2DDrawingCreation

Detailing Fundamentals Overview

46

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ModulesIncluded

Mar-12

DetailCenter

DetailStyles

Appendix,BentleyProSteelCourseSetup

47

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detailing Fundamentals Overview

Modules Included

Detailing Fundamentals Overview

48

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

UserDefinedStylesand
Symbols
ModuleOverview
Thischapterincludestwolessons:UserDefinedStyles;andUserDefinedSymbols.
Youwilllearnhowtoestablishthestylesandwhattheywillbeusedfor.

Lesson1:UserDefinedStyles
InProSteel,youcancustomize(createanduse)thegraphicalrepresentationor
symbolforBenchMarks,ElevationFlags,GridAxis,Handrail,ManualCuts,
PositionFlags,StairStepsandWeldFlags.Thoseblockscanbeassignedtostyles,
whichinturncanbeusedandspecifiedinthe3Dmodelaswellasinthe
DetailCentrefor2Ddrawingproduction.
AllProSteelblocksaregroupedintocategorieswithintheUserBlocksfolder.

Mar-12

255
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

User Defined Styles and Symbols

Lesson 1: User Defined Styles

BoltStyle

Exercise:Creatinganewboltstyle
1

OpentheexamplemodelTRNMODEL.dgn,locatedintheProject
ProSteel_Metric.

Tocreateanewboltstyle,clickfirstontheBoltingbuttonontheProSteel
Elementstoolbartobringupthedialog.

IntheSorttab,clickoncreateanewboltstyle.

Enteranameforthenewboltstyle(i.e.8.8Swith2FW),thenclickthe
checkbutton.
Yournewboltstylewillbelistedintheloadedstyles.

User Defined Styles and Symbols

256

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:UserDefinedStyles

MovetotheBoltStyletabandselectthenewlycreatedboltstylefromthe
BoltStyledropdownlist.

Clickontheboltsettingsbuttonandenteralldesiredspecifications(see
illustrationbellow)thenclickthecheckbutton.

Mar-12

257

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

User Defined Styles and Symbols

Lesson 1: User Defined Styles

Nextclickonthewasherbuttonsandenteralldesiredspecificationsto
matchthefollowingimage,thenclickthecheckbutton.

Clickonthenutbuttonandenteralldesiredspecificationstomatchthe
followingimage,thenclickthecheckbutton.

User Defined Styles and Symbols

258

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:UserDefinedStyles

Repeatthepreviousstepsifataperedwasheroralocknutaredesired.

AtthispointthenewlycreatedBoltStyleisreadyforuseintheactivedrawing,to
haveitavailableforotherdrawingsclickonthebuttonandsavethestyle
externally.
Oncethenewstyleissavedexternallyitcanbeloadedintoadrawingbyclicking
ontheLoadstyledefinitionfromafilebutton.

Mar-12

259

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

User Defined Styles and Symbols

Detail Style

DetailStyle
ThiswillbecoveredinDetailCenterSectionofthisManual.

ElevationFlagStyle

Exercise:Creatinganewelevationflagstyle
1

Tocreateanewelevationflagstyle,clickfirstontheElevationSymbols
buttonontheProSteelUtilitiestoolbar.

IntheSorttab,clickoncreateanewelevationflagstyle.

Enteranameforthenewelevationflagstyle(i.e.DEFAULT),thenclickthe
checkbutton.
Yournewelevationflagstylewillbelistedintheloadedstyles(asfollowing
image).

MovetotheLayouttabandselectthenewlycreatedelevationflagstyle
fromtheElevationFlagdropdown.

SelectCreatedgeometry,thenclickontheEditstyle.

Enteralldesiredspecificationstomatchtheillustrationbelow,thenclick
thecheckbutton.

User Defined Styles and Symbols

260

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DetailStyle

Atthispointthenewlycreatedelevationflagstyleisreadyforuseintheactive
drawing.Tohaveitavailableforotherdrawings,clicktheSaveicontosavethe
styleexternally.
Oncethenewstyleissavedexternally,itcanbeloadedintoadrawingbyclicking
ontheLoadStyleDefinitionfromaFileicon.

PositionFlagStyle
ThiswillbecoveredinDetailCentreSectionofthisManual.

WeldFlagStyle

Exercise:Creatingaweldflagstyle
1

Tocreateanewweldflagstyle,clickontheWeldingSymbolsbuttonon
theProSteelUtilitiestoolbartobringupthedialog.

IntheSorttab,clickonCreateanewweldstyle.

Enteranameforthenewweldflagstyle(i.e.Filled5mm),thenclickthe
checkbutton.
Yournewweldflagstylewillbelistedintheloadedstyles(seeillustration
below).

Mar-12

261

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

User Defined Styles and Symbols

Detail Style

ClickontheWeldStyleDisplaytabandselectthenewlycreatedweldflag
stylefromtheWeldstyledropdown

SelectCreatedgeometry,thenclickontheFlagspecificsettings.

Enteralldesiredspecifications(seedialogbelow),thenclickthecheck
button.

ClickonTopsideorDownsidetosetweldsymbolspecifications(see
illustrationbelow),thenclickthecheckbutton.

User Defined Styles and Symbols

262

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DetailStyle

Atthispointthenewlycreatedweldflagstyleisreadyforuseintheactive
drawing.Tohaveitavailableforotherdrawings,clickontheSaveiconand
savethestyleexternally.
Oncethenewstyleissavedexternally,youcanloaditintoadrawingby
clickingonLoadstyledefinitionfromafileicon.

Mar-12

263

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

User Defined Styles and Symbols

Lesson 2: User Defined Symbols

Lesson2:UserDefinedSymbols
ThislessondescribeshowtocreateuserdefinedsymbolsinProSteel.

Benchmarksymbol(northdirection)
TheBenchmarkisasymbol/markerthatcanbeinsertedintothe3Dmodelto
specify/controlthenorthdirectionforerectionpurpose.TheProSteelBenchmark
hasthetabsshownbelow:

User Defined Styles and Symbols

264

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson2:UserDefinedSymbols

Mar-12

265

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

User Defined Styles and Symbols

Lesson 2: User Defined Symbols

Toinsertabenchmarkintothe3Dmodel,clicktheBenchmarkicononthe
ProSteelUtilitiestoolbar,thenspecifyanorigin/pointandanorthdirection.

ElevationFlagsSymbol
YoucancreateanydesiredsymbolfortheelevationflagwithLines,Arcs,Circles
andTextonly.AddtothemanattributewiththetagVPfortheelevationvalue,
andN1&N2forNotes1&2.ThensavetheblockintheELAVATIONFLAGSfolder.
Warning:TheattributemustnotbemirroredandshouldbeinthePositiveareainbothaxes,
sothatthelowestpointofthegraphicsisat0,0inWCSCoordinate.

ClickonElevationsymbols;thedialogwillappear.IntheLayouttabclickonBlock
pathtoselect..\LOCALISED\ENGLISH\USERBLOCKS\ELEVATIONFLAGS\.Enable
BlockGeometryandselectthenewlycreatedblockfromtheBlockGeometry
dropdown(seeillustration).

User Defined Styles and Symbols

266

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson2:UserDefinedSymbols

AtthispointthenewlycreatedElevationFlagsymbolisreadytobeused.

GridTextBlocksSymbol
YoucancreateanydesiredsymbolforthegridtextblockswithLines,Arcs,Circle
andTextonly.Addtothemtwoattributes,onewiththetagLINE1forthecolumn
gridvalueandanotherifdesiredwiththetagLINE2foracolumnsubgridvalue.
SavetheblockintheGRIDTEXTBLOCKSfolder.Youwillalsoneedtocreatefour
invisibleattributesforthedockinglinesDP1,DP2,DP3&DP4.
Warning:TheattributemustnotbemirroredandshouldbeinthePositiveareainbothaxes,
sothatthelowestpointofthegraphicsisat0,0inWCSCoordinate.

Atthispointthenewlycreatedgridtextblocksymbolisreadytobeused.
ClickonWorkframe;thedialogwillappearafterspecifyinganoriginanda
direction.
IntheLayouttab,checktheAxisdescriptionsbox.IntheLayoutareaoftheTextX
tab,selectblockfromthedropdownofaxisdescriptiontype.
RepeatthesamefortheTextY;intheBlockstab,turnontheEnablefromfile
button,thenclickonBlockpathtoselect
..\LOCALISED\ENGLISH\USERBLOCKS\GRIDAXIS.Selectdesiredblocksfromthe
BlocknameXandBlocknameYdropdowns.

Mar-12

267

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

User Defined Styles and Symbols

Lesson 2: User Defined Symbols

Atthispointthenewlycreatedgridtextblockswillbeappliedtotheworkframe.

ManualCutSymbol
YoucancreateanydesiredsymbolfortheManualCutwithlines,arcs,circlesand
textonly,thensavetheblockinthe
MANUALCUTfolder.
Atthispointthenewlycreatedmanualcutsymbolisreadytobeused.Clickon
Create2DSection.Inthedialogthatappears,intheSymboltab,enabletheBlock
button,thenspecifytheTopBlockandDownBlockbyclickingtheBlockpath
button..\LOCALISED\ENGLISH\USERBLOCKS\MANUALCUT\folder(see
illustration).

Atthispoint,thenewlycreatedManualCutscanbeusedinthedrawing.

User Defined Styles and Symbols

268

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson2:UserDefinedSymbols

PositionFlagsSymbol
ThiswillbecoveredinDetailCentreSectionofthisManual.

WeldFlagsSymbol
YoucancreateanydesiredsymbolfortheweldflagswithLines,Arcs,Circleand
Textonly.Addtothemtwoattributes,onewiththetagDP1andtheothertagDP2
defininginsertionpoints.Theflagreferencelinewillconnecttotheclosestone.
Youcanalsoaddanynumberofattributesfromthelistofavailableattributes
below,thensavetheblockintheWELDFLAGSfolder.

TT:Topside/farsideThickness

TL:Topside/farsideLength

TG:Topside/farsideGap/interval

TC:Topside/line1Comment

DT:Downside/nearsideThickness

DL:Downside/nearsideLength

DG:Downside/nearsideGap/interval

DC:Downside/line2Comment

Warning:TheattributemustnotbemirroredandshouldbeinthePositiveareainbothaxes,
sothatthelowestpointofthegraphicsisat0,0inWCSCoordinate.

Atthispointthenewlycreatedweldflagsymbolisreadytobeused.Clickon
WeldingSymbols;thedialogwillappear.IntheWeldStyleDisplaytab,clickon
Blockpathtoselect..\LOCALISED\ENGLISH\USERBLOCKS\WELDFLAGS\.
EnableBlockGeometryandselectthenewlycreatedblockfromtheBlock
Geometrydropdown(seeillustration).

Mar-12

269

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

User Defined Styles and Symbols

Lesson 2: User Defined Symbols

Atthispointthenewlycreatedweldflagcanbeinsertedintothedrawing.

User Defined Styles and Symbols

270

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ProSteelGrouping
ModuleOverview
ThischapterdiscussesGroups.EachGroupalwaysconsistsofoneprimary
componentpartandasmanysecondarypartsasdesired.Groupscannotbe
nested,whichmeansthatagroupcannotbeasecondarypartofanothergroup.

ModuleObjectives

Mar-12

LearnhowtoinvoketheGroupsdialog

Learnhowtodeterminewhatpartsexistingroupsandwhichpartsarenotin
agroup

Learnhowtomanipulatethedisplaywithinthemodelusinggroups

Learnhowtoaddpartstoanexistinggroup

271
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

ProSteel Grouping

Lesson 1: ProSteel Grouping

Lesson1:ProSteelGrouping
Grouping
GroupinginProSteelissynonymoustoassembly.Itdefineswhichpartsare
detailedandshippedtogether.Duetoitsimportance,ProSteelprovidesanumber
oftoolsforcreating,editing,deleting,searching,viewing,etc.Amainmember
andanynumberofsubmembersdefineagroupstructure,however,ifdesired,a
groupcanbeassignedtoasinglememberthatisthemainpart.
Note: EachelementcanexistonlyinoneGroupatatime.Whencreatinggroups,start

withthesubgroupsandlastlytheassemblies.Inmostcasesyouwillsimply
workwiththegroups.Thesubgroupsandassembliesfeaturesarefor
exceptionaluse.

Assemblies
Assembliescanincludegroupsandsubgroupsaswellassingleparts.Thereisno
mainparttoanassembly,justacollectionofvariousobjects.Itisthelargestof
thethreegrouptypes.

Groups
Agroupisacollectionofpartsand/orsubgroups,whicharerecognizedasa
singleitem.Amainpartisassignedtothegroupandallotherpartsare
consideredsubpartsofthegroup.Thesegroupscanbecalledintoa2Ddrawing
anddimensionedtogetherasasingleitem.Groupsarethedefaulttypecreated
whendoingconnectionsandothertasksthathavetheGroupoptionwithinits
menu.

ProSteel Grouping

272

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:ProSteelGrouping

SubGroups
Almostidenticalinnaturetothegroups,SubGroupsarehandledinthesameway
thatgroupsareandhaveaccesstoallthesametoolsasgroupsdo.
Subgroupscanbeusedwhenonesinglepartisrequiredintwogroups.Sincea
singlepartcanonlybepartofoneGroupatatime,aSubGroupcanbeformed
andthesamesinglepartcanbeplacedintothissecondgrouptypestructure.

Exercise:InvokingtheGroupsdialog
1

Mar-12

OpentheexamplemodelTRNMODEL.dgn,locatedintheProject
ProSteel_Metric.

273

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

ProSteel Grouping

Lesson 1: ProSteel Grouping

Selectisometricview(clickIsometricOverviewicon).

OpentheAdministrateGroupsdialog(ProSteel>Groups>Dialog)orclick
Groupicon.

ProSteel Grouping

274

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:ProSteelGrouping

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheAdministerGroups
dialog.
Name

Description

Create

Youcanassignpartstomaterialgroupsbyusingthisfunction.
Clickthemainpartofthematerialgroupandthenselectthepartstobeassigned.
Thepartstobeassignedcanalsobeselectedinafield.Themainpartthatmayhave
beenselectedtwiceandotherconstructionlinesareignoredinthiscase.Onlysteelor
specialpartscanbeselectedforagroup.
Thepart'snewselectionisignoredifitalreadybelongstoagroup.

Release

Agroupcanbedetachedbyusingthisfunction.Todoso,clickanypartofthegroup.
Removalofsinglepartsfromthegroupisalsopossible.

Delete

Youcandeleteallpartsofagroupwiththisfunction.Clickanypartofthegrouptodo
this.

Edit

Thisfunctionshowsthegroupdatathroughthefollowingdialog.

Youcanenterthedataoftheselectedgroupforthepartslistsinthetopfields.
ThepositioninthefieldPos.No.hasbeentakenoverfromthemainpart,providedthe
"TakeoverMainpartInfo"fieldwasselected.Subsequentmodificationoftheposition
numberispossible.
Youcanseetheouterdimensionsandthetotalweightofthegroupatthebottom.
Takeover
MainpartData

Thedataofthemainpartisacceptedasgroupdataforthepartslists.Subsequent
modificationofthisdataispossible.

AddElements

Partsareaddedtoagroupbyusingofthisfunction.Thecompletegroupwillbe
selectedwhenyouclickanypartofthegroup.FurtherAccessoryPartscanbeaddedby
clickingthem.

RemoveElements Partsareremovedfromagroupbyusingthisfunction.Thecompletegroupwillbe
selectedwhenyouclickanypartofthegroup.Clickthepartstoberemoved.
Export

Mar-12

Agroupcanbeexportedandstoredinanexternalfile.Itcanbeinsertedintoanother
drawingbyusingImportGroups.Thegroupstructurewillremainunchanged.When
prompted,selectobjectsbyclickinganypartofthegroup.

275

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

ProSteel Grouping

Lesson 1: ProSteel Grouping

Name

Description

Import

Astoredgroupcanbeinsertedintoyourdrawingbyusingthisfunction.Theexisting
groupstructureismaintained,whenthefieldExplodeBlocksafterInsertionhasbeen
clicked,orifyoudroptheimportedcellusingPS_EXPLODE.

SelectionMode

Youdecidewhetheragroupistobeloadedcompletelywhenselectingapartofitor
whetherthepartsshallremainindependentwiththisfunction.Clickanypartofthe
group.Themodewillchangeaccordingtoyourselection,andthecurrentstatuswillbe
displayedinthecommandline.

ExportComplete WhenExporting,thisenablesyoutoselectawholegroupbyselectingjustonemember.
Group
Ifthisfieldisunmarked,youneedtoselectallPartsexplicitlytomanipulatethem.All
GroupsgeneratedbyProSteelduringaconnectionhavethisfeatureenabled.
DissolveBlock
afterInsert

Thegroupisautomaticallyexplodedwhenbeingimported.Thestructureofthegroup
remainsunchanged.

Count

AllgroupsinthedrawingarecountedanddisplayedintheNumberfieldbelowthis
button.

ClickontheVerifytabandreviewthefollowingfunctions.

ThefollowingtableprovidesadescriptionofthefieldsintheVerifytab.
Name

Description

CheckGroups

MarkOrphans:Ifthisfieldischecked,allvalidgroupsarehiddenaccordingtothe
specificationswhencheckingagroup.Partsthatbelongtonogrouparemarkedin
colour.UsethecommandGlobalSettings>Colourstospecifywhatcolourstoapply.
Colouredmarkingsareremovedonceyouassignthepartstoagrouporwhenyou
selecttheRegeneratecommand.

Orphans>
Groups

CreatesonegroupoutofeachselectedOrphanobject.

ProSteel Grouping

276

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:ProSteelGrouping

Name

Description

Search

Hidingothergroupscanbeusedtosearchforgroups.Enterthepositionnumbersofthe
groupstobesearchedinthefieldSearchNumbersandclickthebuttonSearch.
Selectthepartstobesearched(inmostcases,youwillselectallofthepartsinafield)
andconfirmyourselectionbypressingtheEnterkeyortherightmousebutton.Only
thosegroupswhosepositionnumbersyouhaveenteredwillremainvisible.Byusing
theRegeneratecommandyoucanrecalltheothergroups.
Severalpositionnumberscanbeenteredatthesametime,providedtheyareseparated
byadecimalpoint.Completepositionareasmustbeseparatedbyahyphen.Ifyou
searchthepositionsNo.5and7or17through28,youenterthevalue5,7,1728inthe
SearchNumbersfield.
IftheHidefieldisenabled,allpartsnotsatisfyingthesearchconditionarehidden.The
hiddenpartsbecomevisibleagainwhenthedrawingisregenerated.
IftheMarkfieldisenabled,allofthepartsfoundinthesearchedarehighlightedinthe
drawing.
IftheZoomExtentsfieldisenabled,allpartssatisfyingthesearchconditionare
automaticallyzoomed.AdialogdisplaysallowingyoutoindicatetheDisplaySize(zoom
factor)andtonavigatetoeachcomponentfound.

Mar-12

Hide

UsingtheMainPart,Singleparts,andAllPartsoptionsinthissectionyouchoosewhich
partsofagroupyoucanhide.Clickanypartofthegrouptodothis.Youcanrecallthe
partsusingtheDisplaycommand.

Display

Displaysallhiddengroupsorgroupparts.

Compare

Groupsofthesamepositionarecheckedforequalityinthisfunction.SelectmainParts
ofthegrouptobechecked.IftheCompareandchangeoptionisenabledandthe
programfindsgroupswiththesamepositionnumberbutwithdifferentstructure,
indicesareaddedtothepositionnumberstodifferentiatethem.

277

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

ProSteel Grouping

Lesson 2: Parts in a Group

Lesson2:PartsinaGroup
Sometimesyoucanworkwithexistinggroupsandnotknowwhatpartsareinthe
group.Thisexerciseshowsyouhowtodeterminethisinformation.

Exercise:Determiningwhatpartsareinagroup
1

WiththeAdministerGroupsdialogdisplayedandtheVerifytabselected,
selecttheCheckGroupsbuttonandnotethedisplayinthemodel.

Refreshyourdisplaytoshowallpartsinthemodel(ProSteelmenu>
Groups>Dialog,thenpressDisplay).

Whatjusthappened?WheninitiatingtheCheckGroupsfunction,ProSteelscans
themodelandsearchesforallpartsassociatedtoagroupanddisablestheir
display.Thisactsasquickreferencetodeterminewhatpartsarenotinagroup
andleavestheseelementsdisplayed.Thiswillallowyoutobetterdetermine
whichgroups,ifany,theserogueelementsbelongin.
Beforewestartaddingthesepartsintoagroupwewillinvestigateotherfunctions
withintheGroupsfunction.

ProSteel Grouping

278

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson3:ControllingModelDisplayviatheGroupsFunction

Lesson3:ControllingModelDisplayviatheGroupsFunction
YoucanusetheGroupsfunctionalitytocontrolhowyourmodelisdisplayed.

Mar-12

Exercise:ControllingthemodeldisplayusingGroups
1

WindowAreaontheconnectionbetweenthecrossbeamandthecolumn
locatedatcoordinateA1.

OpentheAdministerGroupsdialog(ProSteel>Groups>Dialog).

ClickontheVerifytab.WiththeAllPartsoptionenabled,presstheHide
button.

279

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

ProSteel Grouping

Lesson 3: Controlling Model Display via the Groups Function

Thefollowingpromptisdisplayed:
SelectPartofGrouptobeHidden
SelectObjects:
4

Pickthecrossbeamandnotethedisplayofthemodel.Rightclicktoend
theHideGroupsfunction.
Notethatallpartsofthegroupdisappearedfromtheviewofthemodel.
Thisshowshowthehidegroupsfunctioncanbeusedtocontrolmodel
display.Thisisveryimportantwhenworkingwithalargemodelcongested
bymanypartsanddetailedjoints.

WiththeAdministerGroupsdialogstilldisplayed,presstheDisplaybutton
toreturnthemodeltoafulldisplayofallparts.
Wewillperformthesameoperationagain,onlythistimewithgrouping
hidingonlycertainelementsofthegroup.

Loadthegroupfunctionand,beforepressingtheHidebutton,settheHide
sectionofthedialogtohideonlySinglePartsbyenablingthepulldown
selectionasshownbelow.

ProSteel Grouping

280

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson3:ControllingModelDisplayviatheGroupsFunction

NowpresstheHidebuttonandpickthesamecrossbeamasbefore.Note
thedisplaywithinthemodel.ThistimeonlytheSubPartsofthegroup
havebeenhidden.

FromProSteelmenu,selectProSteelRegentoreturnthesetthedisplayto
allparts.

Note:Beforemovingontobuildinggroupsitisimportanttodifferentiate

betweentheReleasebuttonandtheDeletebuttonthatarelocatedin
theAdmintab.
Ifyouwishtobreakupagroupandstillhavethepartsinthemodel,use
theReleasefunction.Thiswilldissolvethegroupbutleaveallpartsin
themodel.
Ifyouwishtocompletelyremovethegroupedpartsfromthemodel,
usetheDeletebutton.Thiswilldissolvethegroupanddeletethese
itemsfromthemodel.
Note: TheSinglePartsselectionintheverifytabactuallyreferstosubpartsof

groups,notsinglelooseparts.
TheSettingsTab,shownbelow,givestheuserthepossibilitytomake
multipleselectionsorloopgroupingcommand.

Mar-12

281

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

ProSteel Grouping

Lesson 4: Adding Component Parts to a Group

Lesson4:AddingComponentPartstoaGroup
Inthislesson,youwilllearnhowtoaddpartstoanexistinggroup.
1

Windowareaintotheareaoftwomanualbaseplateslocatedoncolumns
locatedatcoordinatesB3andC3(clickIsometricOverviewicon).

OpentheAdministerGroupsdialog(ProSteelmenu>Groups>Dialog>
Admin)orclickAdministerGroupicon.

FromtheGroupstab,selecttheAddElementsbutton.
Thefollowingpromptisdisplayed:PickaPartoftherequiredgroup

PickthecolumnlocatedatcoordinateB3.
Thefollowingpromptisdisplayed:SelectPartstoaddtotheselected
Group

Pickthebaseplatelocatedatthebottomofthecolumn.Rightclicktoend
theadditionofparts,andthenrightclickasecondtimetoendthe
function.

Note:Afterselectingthegroupparttowhichyouwilladdcomponents,the

softwarewillautomaticallyshifttotheADDfunctionandpromptyouto
pickthoseelementstoadd.Continueselectingpartsuntilyouare
finished.Rightclicktoselectanothergroupparttoadditemsto.Right
clicktwicetoendtheAddElementsfunction.
6

ProSteel Grouping

Repeattheprocessandaddtheotherplatetothegroupofthecolumn
locatedatcoordinateC3.

282

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

CreatingandManipulatingPart
Families
ModuleOverview
Inthischapter,youwilllearnhowtocreateProSteelPartFamilies,modifythem,
andcreateaPartDescriptionforthem.

ModulesObjectives

Mar-12

LearnaboutDisplayClasses,AreaClassesandPartFamilies

CreateDisplayClasses,AreaClassesandPartFamilies

AssignourWorkframetotheDisplayClasses,AreaClassesandPartFamilies

CycletheDisplayClassestocontroltheviewinthemodel

283

Creating and Manipulating Part Families

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Lesson 1: Creating and Manipulating Part Families

Lesson1:CreatingandManipulatingPartFamilies
Inthissection,youwilllearnwhatDisplayClasses,AreaClasses,andPartFamilies
areandhowtocreatethem.Additionallyyouwilllearnhowtoassignstructural
elementsandobjectstothemtomakeviewingthemodeleasierinthecaseof
complexmodels.

PartFamilies
PartFamiliesareamechanismtoautomaticallyallocateprefixes,coloursand
DetailStylesduringthepositioningprocessbycategorizingdifferenttypesof
components(e.g.,columns,beams,gussetplates,etc).2Dlinetypesandcolour
canalsobecontrolledthroughthePartFamilies.
Inthissection,youwilllearnhowtocreatePartFamilies.Someofthedisplay
classesyoucreatewillbeusedlaterinthemodellingprocess.
PartFamiliesshouldbecreated,componentsassignedtotheseandthenthePart
Familyprefixshouldbeusedduringpositioning.
Note: EachcomponentcanbelongtoonlyonePartFamilyatatime.

Exercise:CreatingPartFamiliesandassigningObjectstothem
1

OpentheexamplemodelTRNMODEL.dgn,locatedintheProject
ProSteel_Metric.

Creating and Manipulating Part Families

284

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:CreatingandManipulatingPartFamilies

OpentheProSteelPartFamiliesdialog(ProSteelmenu>PartFamilies)or
clickthePartFamiliesicon.

YoumustassignnamestothePartFamilies.Doubleclickononeofthe
emptylistentriesandenteranameintheinputfield.
Anewdialogwillappear.

Mar-12

EnterDescription,PosPrefixandColour.

285

Creating and Manipulating Part Families


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Lesson 1: Creating and Manipulating Part Families

AssignnamestoPartFamilies,asshownbelow.

Creating and Manipulating Part Families

286

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson2:UserdefinedPartDescription

Lesson2:UserdefinedPartDescription
ProSteelprovidesamechanismtoassignuserdefinablepart/shapedescriptions
thatcanbeusedduringthecreationandeditingofparts(e.g.,specifyinglayer,
colourandlinetype),searchingandorganizingandfilteringthedisplayofparts
andthedimensioningrulesduring2Ddrawingproduction.

Exercise:Assigningadescriptiontoashape
1

Selectashapeinthe3Dmodel.

RightclickandselectProSteelPropertiesfromthecontextmenu.

TheShapePropertiesdialogwillappear.
3

Mar-12

FromtheDescriptiondropdownintheAssignmenttab,selectany
predefineddescription.

287

Creating and Manipulating Part Families


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Lesson 2: User-defined Part Description

Thisdropdownlistiscontrolledbyatextfile
(..\Localised\[country]\Data\pro_st3d.fdf).Itcontainssomepredefined
descriptionsbutismodifiablebytheuserwiththehelpofatexteditor
suchasMicrosoftNotepad.

ThePRO_ST3D.FDFdatacontentisarrangedasfollows:

Creating and Manipulating Part Families

288

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson2:UserdefinedPartDescription

Index,description[layername,layercolor,layerlinetype][,colournormal,
linetypenormal,colourhidden,linetypehidden]
Notethat"normal"impliesvisiblelineson2Ddetailsand"hidden"implies
hiddenlineson2Ddetails.

Mar-12

289

Creating and Manipulating Part Families


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Lesson 2: User-defined Part Description

Creating and Manipulating Part Families

290

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

PositioningandMaterial
Takeoffs
ModuleOverview
Thismodulecontainsthreelessons:PositioningtheModel;CreatingaPartsList;
andCreatingaDrawingPartsList.EachLessoncontainsanumberofexercisesthat
aredesignedtoteachyouthetopicslistedintheobjectives.

ModuleObjectives
AftercompletingLesson1inthismodule,youwillbeableto:

SetthedefaultsforPositioning

DefinethePositionFlags

PositiontheModel

AftercompletingLesson2inthismodule,youwillbeableto:

Createanexternalpartslist

Editthepartslistdataandformat

Generatetheactualreport

AftercompletingLesson3inthismodule,youwillbeableto:

Mar-12

Learnhowtocreateapartslist

Modifythepartlistcontents

291
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

Lesson1:PositioningtheModel
Inthissection,youwilllearnhowtosetthedefaultsforpositioning,definethe
positionflags,andpositionthemodel.

Exercise1:SettingtheDefaultsforPositioning
1

OpentheexamplemodelTRNMODEL.dgn,locatedintheProject
ProSteel_Metric.

Viewtheisometricviewofthemodelbyselectingthemainmenusitem
ProSteel>Zoom/Views>IsometricOverview.

OpentheProSteelPositionflagsandPositioningdialogbyselectingthe
mainmenuitemProSteel>Positioning>Positioningorselectthe
Positioningicon.Inthedialog,selecttheSteelPositioningtab.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

292

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:PositioningtheModel

DescriptionsofthefieldsintheSteelPositioningtabareprovidedinthetable
below:
Name

Description

Plugin

Listshowsallavailableexternalpositioningplugins.Thislistisonlyavailablewhenthe
UseexternalPlugInoptionisenabled.

Type

Allowsyoutoenterthetypeofthepositionnumber.
Numericalmeansthatthepositionnumbersarecomposedofnumbersonly.
Alphanumericalmeansthatthepositionnumbersarecomposedoflettersonly.The
orderthenisA,B,...,Z,AA,AB,....etc.
Mixedmeansthatthepositionnumbersarecomposedofanumericalandan
alphanumericalpart.Thenumericalpartisfollowingthealphanumericalpart,theorder
isA1,A2,...,A9,B1,B2,etc.Thenumberofnumericalpositionscanbepresetunder>
'Limits'.

Filter

Allowsyoutodeterminewhichpartstobepositioned.
All:Whenpressingthisbutton,allselectedpartswillbepositioned.
OnlyEmpty:Whenpressingthisbutton,onlythoseselectedpartswillbepositioned
thathavenotyetbeenassignedapositionnumber(e.g.,newparts).
OnlyChanged:Whenpressingthisbutton,onlythoseselectedpartswillbepositioned
thathavebeenchanged.Thus,afterdetailingchangedpartscanbeassignednew
positionnumbers,ifnecessarythepartsareidentifiedusing"ModificationTags,"which
willbedeletedwhenthepartconcernedisdetailed.Thismeansthatpartsareassigned
newpositionnumbersthathaveactivechangetags(queryviacommand'Shapes>
ChangeProperties>Data').

Mar-12

293

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

Name

Description

LastSingle

Displaysthelastusedpositionnumberforsingleelements.

LastGroup

Displaysthelastusedpositionnumberforgroupelements.

Increment

IntheIncrementfieldyouenterautomaticincrementingofthepositionnumbers
(normallybyonestep).

Next

IntheNextNo.fieldyouenterthenumbertobeassignedtothefirstparttobe
positioned.

UseShipping
Number

EnablethisoptiontouseSendNumbersinsteadofPositionnumbers.

UseXrefs

Enablestheuseofanexternalpluginforpositioninginsteadofusingthebuiltindefault
functions.
Callsthedialogforautomaticpositioning.
ResetsthePositioningoptions.
Processesautomaticpositioningonlyforsinglepartswiththegivensettings.
Processesautomaticpositioningonlyforgroupswiththegivensettings.
Processesautomaticpositioningforbothpartsandgroupswiththegivensettings.

Afterreviewingthesettingforpositioning,youwillsettheoptionsfor
AutomaticPositioning.IntheProSteelPositionflagsandPositioningdialog,
selecttheCalltheDialogforAutomaticPositioningiconandsetthe
parametersoneachtabasfollows:

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

294

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:PositioningtheModel

Mar-12

295

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

296

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:PositioningtheModel

Descriptionsofthefieldsintheabovedialogareprovidedinthetablebelow:
Name

Description

Filter

Thesepartsareconsideredincaseofautomaticpositioning.Selecttheparts(shapes,
specialshapes,plates,boltsandotherspecialparts)thataretobenumberedinone
operation.
SortFlatslikePlates:EnablethisoptiontoconsiderFlatsandPlatesequalforPre
Sorting.

PreSort(Left
Window)

SetstheorderofthePreSort.Usethearrowbuttonsnexttothewindowtomovea
valueupordown.

PostSort

SetstheOrderofthePostSort.Usethearrowbuttonsnexttothewindowtomovea
valueupordown.

Options

OverwriteExistingmeansexistingpositionnumberswillbeoverwrittenwhenassigning
newones.
IfEqualPartDetectionisenabled,thepartsarecheckedforequality.Iftheyare
identical,theyareassignedthesamepositionnumber.Partsareconsideredidentical
whendeviationswithrespecttodimensionsanddrilldiameterarewithinthevalues
givenasreferencetolerances.
IfEqualGroupDetectionisenabled,thegroupsarecheckedforequality.Groupsare
consideredidenticalwhenidenticalpartsarearrangedinthesamemountingposition
singlepartsareonlycomparedusingtheirpositionnumber(i.e.,ifpartsareidentical
buthavedifferentpositionnumbers,thegroupswillalsobeassigneddifferentposition
numbers).
IfConsiderWeldMarksisenabledthenWeldMarksareusedtocompareelements.
FirstMainParts,thenSubPartsmeansthatfirst,allmainpartsofgroupsarepositioned
(andsortedaccordingtothesortingcriteriawithinthegroups),followedbythe
accessoryparts(alsosortedaccordingtothesortingcriteria).Thiscanbedeemedasan
additional,evenhigherrankingsortingcriterion.
Subpartsstartsat:Determinesfromwhichnumber,groupsubpartswillbepositioned.

Groups

DifferentiationUnequalGroups:Whenthegroupisassignedthepositionofthemain
part(normalcase),itmayhappenthattwodifferentgroupshavingthesamemainpart
areassignedidenticalpositionnumbers.Insuchcases,theprogramwillcheckwhether
ornotthegroupsarereallyidentical.Ifnot,itwillchangethegrouppositionnumber.
25>25.1meansthechangedgrouppositionsareidentifiedbytheindex.1,etc.,
followingtheirpositionnumber(i.e.,100.1,100.2,...).
25>25AmeansthechangedgrouppositionsareidentifiedbytheindexA,etc.,
followingtheirpositionnumber(i.e.100A,100B,...).
25>MAX+1meanspositioningofthechangedgrouppositionsiscontinuedafterthe
highestpositioncurrentlyassigned.

Mar-12

297

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

Name

Description

GroupOptions

TheMax=SubpartMaxoptiondeterminesifthenextavailablePositionnumberisa
singleorgroupnumber
IfTakeoverMainPartPosition>Groupisenabled,thepositionofthemainpartistaken
overasgroupposition.Ifnecessary,thegrouppositionischangedafterwards(see
DifferentiationGroups).Ifthisisnotrequested,thegrouppositionswillstartatthe
positionenteredinGroupsStartattheLast[+].

PositionPrefix

Thisallowsexplanatorytexttobeenteredbeforethegroupposition.Itispossibleto
differentiatebetweensupportbeams,girdersandothergroups,thedifferentiation
alwaysbeingrelatedtothemainpartofthegroup.
InColumns,youenterthedesignationforallverticalshapes.Intheattributefield
DeviationinDegrees,youenterananglewithinwhichtheshapeisstillconsideredtobe
vertical.
InBeams,youenterthedesignationforallhorizontalshapes.Intheattributefield
DeviationinDegrees,youenterananglewithinwhichtheshapeisstillconsideredtobe
horizontal.Verticalandhorizontalarealwaysrelatedtotheworkframe,i.e.,tothex/y
planeoftheWCS.
InOther,youenterthedesignationforallothergroups.
ThePositionTolerancefieldsdeterminethepositiontoleranceforverticalcolumnsand
horizontalbeams.
IfUsePartFamilyPrefixesisenabled,thefamilyclassesprefixissetinfrontifthe
componentpartbelongstoafamilyclassandaprefixisplanned.

Tolerances
GeometryCheck

GeometryCheck:Comparesthepartswiththevisiblegeometry,lineforline.
MinimumLineLengthmeansadditionallinesuptothespecifiedlengtharenot
consideredforacomparison.
LengthTolerancemeanslengthdeviationsdonotresultinadifferentpart.
HoleTolerancemeansdeviationsofthedrillholeaxisuptothespecifiedlengthdonot
resultinadifferentpart.

Tolerances
VolumeCheck

Comparesthepartswiththevisiblevolume.YoucannotmixFacetandAcisbodies.
MaxPartDifference:Setsthemaximumdifferencein%uptowhichtheelementsare
treatedasidentical.
Max.GroupDifference:Setsthemaximumdifferencein%uptowhichthegroupsare
treatedasidentical.

Oncetheparametersarespecified,clickthecheckbuttontoreturntothe
ProSteelPositionflagsandPositioningdialog.Keepthisdialogopenforthe
nextexercise.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

298

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:PositioningtheModel

Exercise2:DefinePositionFlags
1

ClickontheSorttabintheProSteelPositionflagsandPositioningdialog.
SelecttheCreatesaNewPositionFlagStyleicon.

CreatesaNewPositionFlagStyleicon
2

TypeSinglepartsintotheEntertheNameofthenewPositionflagStyle
dialog,andthenclickthecheckbutton.Repeatthisproceduretoadda
Boltsstyle.Whenfinished,thenewstyleswillbedisplayedintheLoaded
Styleswindow,asshownbelow:

ClickontheLayouttabintheProSteelPositionflagsandPositioningdialog.

Mar-12

299

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

SelectSinglepartsintheStylefiledandthenselecttheEnablesSettingof
PositionFlagStyleicon,adjacenttotheCreatedGeometryfield.

SettheparametersfortheSinglepartsstyleinthePosflagDefinitiondialog
asseenbelow.Clickthecheckbuttontoapplythesettings.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

300

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:PositioningtheModel

Descriptionsofthefieldsintheabovedialogareprovidedinthetablebelow:
Name

Description

LineType

Allowsyoutodefinethekindofguidelinetobeused.
NoLineNoguidelinewillbedisplayed.
NormalLineOnlyonelinewillbedisplayed.
LinewithArrowAlinewithanarrowwillbedisplayed.
LinewithDotAlinewithapointwillbedisplayed.

BubbleForm

Allowsyoutodefinethekindofpositionnumber.
NoBubble:onlythenumberisdisplayed.
RoundBubble:thenumberisdisplayedinanoval.
RectangularBubble:thenumberisdisplayedinafield.
SixEdgedBubble:thenumberisdisplayedinahexagon.
OnLine:thenumberisdisplayedontheconstructionline.

TextType

Allowsyoutodefinethetypeofshapedesignationincaseoflengthindication.
U100...160:thedesignationisasfollowsIPE270...7890.
U100160:thedesignationisasfollowsIPE2707890.
U100x160:thedesignationisasfollowsIPE270x7890.
FormatTemplate:Thedesignationisasindicatedinthe'FormatTemplate'inputfield.

Alignment

Allowsyoutodeterminethedirectionoftheconstructionlinewithrespecttothe
positiontext.
AtShape:thedirectionisinparalleltoshape.
AtLine:youwillbepromptedtoenterareferencelinebyclicking.Textwillbealigned
accordingly.
AtHorizon:thedirectionishorizontal.
AtVertical:thedirectionisvertical.

TextStyle

Mar-12

Specifiesthetextstyleforthetextofthepositionflag.

301

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

Name

Description

DefaultFormat

Specifiestheformatfortheuserdefinedshapedesignationifyouhaveselected'Format
Template'astexttype.Thefollowingparametersareavailable.
$(N)forpartname
$(L)forpartlength
$(W)forpartwidth
$(T)forpartthickness
Theresultoftheformatstring$(N)$(T)x$(W)woulde.g.beplate5x380

PosNr.Prefix/
Postfix

IntheinputfieldPrefixorPostfixyoucanenteratextwhichisdisplayedinfrontofor
afterthepositionofthepositionflag.Thedefaultcanbesetindependentlyofeach
otherforbothnumbers.

ShippingNr.
Prefix/Postfix

IntheinputfieldPrefixorPostfixyoucanenteratextwhichisdisplayedinfrontofor
aftertheshippingnumberofthepositionflag.Thedefaultcanbesetindependentlyof
eachotherforbothnumbers.

Divide

Specifiesatextwhichiswrittenbetweenpositionnumberandshippingnumber,ifboth
numbershavetobedisplayedaspositionnumberentryinthepositionflag.

Layout

Allowsyoutodeterminewhichinformationtobedisplayed.
TotalNumber:thenumberofpartsisdisplayed,e.g.,17xIPE270.
Name:thedesignationisdisplayed(e.g.,theshapedesignation).
Comment:thecommentsofthepartslistsaredisplayed.
ItemNumber:displaytheArticlenumberofthepartsinthepositionflag.
Dimensions:displaythepartsdimensionsofthepartsinthepositionflag.
Positionnumber:thepositionnumberisdisplayed.
ShippingNumber:theshippingnumberisdisplayed.
Material:thematerialdesignationisdisplayed.
OriginalPositionNumber:thefixed(former)positionnumberisdisplayed.

Options

NoLine:suppressestheleaderlineofthepositionflag.
Dynamic:Createsanassociationbetweentheobjectandthepositionflag.
GroupLength:Usegroupdimensionfordisplayifagroupisselected.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

302

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:PositioningtheModel

Name

Description

Size

Youcandefinethetextsizeforgeneralletteringandforpositionnumbers(No.size).For
printing,theMicroStationtextsizesarescaledaccordingtoselectedscale.

Colours

YousetthecorrespondingcolourfortheflagasMicroStationcolournumberusingthe
fieldsLine,Number,BubbleandText.Ifyouenter1asvalue,thepresettingwillbe
used.

SelectBoltsintheStylefiledandthenselecttheEnablesSettingof
PositionFlagStyleicon,adjacenttotheCreatedGeometryfield.

Note:UponselectingtheBoltsstyle,thefollowingdialogmaydisplay,

promptingyoutosavethechangestotheSinglepartsstyle.Pressthe
checkbuttontocontinuewiththeBoltsstylesettings.

Mar-12

303

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

SettheparametersfortheBoltsstyleinthePosflagDefinitiondialogas
seenbelow.Then,clickthecheckbuttontoapplythesettings.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

304

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:PositioningtheModel

Exercise3:PositiontheModel
1

UseElementSelection>Blocktoselectallelementsinthemodel.

WiththeProSteelPositionflagsandPositioningdialogstillopen,selectthe
SteelPositioningtabandthenclickontheProcessAutomaticPositioning
forallPartswithGivenSettingsicon.

Note:ClickthecheckbuttonwhenpromptedtosavechangesfortheBolts

style.
Thesystemwillbeginthepositioningprocessandwhencompletewill
displaytheProSteelPositioning:ResultSinglePartdialog,asshownbelow.
ThisservesasavisualcheckonwhatSinglepartswerepositioned.Its
contentsarenoteditable.

Mar-12

ClickthecheckbuttonintheProSteelPositioning:ResultsSingleParts
dialog.TheProSteelPositioning:ResultGroupsdialogwillappearon
screen.

Clickthecheckbuttontocompletetheprocessandallowpositioningto
applythesortingandcomparisonoptions.

305

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

Oncethesystemreturnsustoourmodel,wewillviewtheProSteel
Propertiesofanitem.PickthecolumnlocatedatcoordinateA1andright
clicktoaccesstheProSteelPropertiesfromthepopupmenu.

AccesstheDatapageandnotethePos.No.field.SwitchtotheGroupData
pageandnotethePos.No.field.Onepositionnumberisforthepartand
theotherisforthegroup.Also,notethatthepositioninghasalsocounted
howmanyofthispartandthegroupexistinthemodel.Afterapplyingthe
comparisonoptions,thesystemnowknowsthatthismodelhastwo
groupsthatareexactlyalike(columnassembliesatA1andB1).

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

306

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson2:CreatinganExternalPartsList

Lesson2:CreatinganExternalPartsList
Inthissection,youwilllearnhowtocreateapartslist,editthepartslistdataand
format,andgeneratetheactualreport.

Exercise1:CreatethePartsList
1

Mar-12

OpenthePartlistCreationdialogbyselectingthemainmenuitem
ProSteel>Additions>PartlistDatabaseInthePartlistCreationdialog,
settheparametersasfollows:

307

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Lesson 2: Creating an External Parts List

Descriptionsofthefieldsintheabovedialogareprovidedinthetablebelow:
Name

Description

SelectionTypes

Allowsyoutoselectthepartsforwhichapartslististobecreated.
3Dparts:meansthatyouselectthepartsfromtheworkframe.
2Dpositionsflags:meansthatthepartslistswillbedeductedfromthepositionflagsof
adetailedworkshopdrawing.Frommodified2Ddrawingsyoucangeneratenewbillsof
materials.

Options

Verifypositionnumber:onlythoseselectedpartswillbetakenoverintothepartslists
thathaveavalidpositionnumber.
OnlyGroupParts:onlythoseselectedpartswillbetakenoverintothepartsliststhat
areassignedtoagroup.
OnlySelectedparts:Onlyselectedpartsarewrittentothepartslist.Ifdisabled,thenthe
completegroupsoftheselectedpartsarewrittentothepartslist.
CreateGrouprecord:Grouprecordsarecreatedforallcompletegroupsthatare
selected.Otherwise,nogrouprecordsarewrittenintothepartslist.
IfStartPartsListisclicked,partslistprocessingisloadedimmediatelyaftercreationof
partslistfilebymeansofthisfile.
CalculateNCCutAngles:DefinescutanglesforgenerationofaNCfilethatcanberead
byaNCmachinetofabricateasection.
StraightEndatfront:TurnstheNCdatasoaneventualstraightEndisatfront.
WithWelds:Addswelddataintopartslist.
CombineWelds:Combinesallweldsofsamestyleandthicknessintooneentry.

Bolts

IfBoltswithoutPositionNumberisclicked,boltswillbeincludedinthepartslists,even
iftheyhavenopositionnumber.WashersExtra,NutsExtra,SafetyWashersExtra,
TaperedWashersExtrameansthattheadditionalpartsfortheboltsareseparately
specifiedinthelistofmaterials.

OutputFile

ThefileforthelistofmaterialsisstoredinthefiledisplayedintheNamefield,for
example,intheXBASEformat.
BypressingtheFilebuttonyoucansetthedirectoryinthesamemannerasyouuseto
dounderWindows.

WithBolts

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Bypressingthisbutton,youstartpartselection.Theselectedboltswillbeconsideredas
well.

308

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson2:CreatinganExternalPartsList

Name

Description

WithoutBolts

Bypressingthisbutton,youstartpartselection.Boltswillnotbeconsidered,even
thoughtheyhavebeenselected.

MountingList

Bypressingthisbutton,youstartpartselection.Onlythemainpartsofgroupsincluding
boltswillbeconsidered.

SelecttheEnablesSelectionofDataiconintheOutputFilesectionofthe
PartlistCreationdialogandnamethedatabaseyouwanttocreate.

Hint:Itisrecommendedthatyounamethedatabasethesamenameasthe

model.Inthisinstance,namethedatabaseTRNMODEL.MDB.
3

SelecttheCreatesaPartlistwithoutBoltsiconinthePartlistCreation
dialog.

Whenpromptedto:Selectallpartstoaddinbillofmaterial,RETURNfor
allShift+ESCforFilterandSelectObjects,keyinAllatthecommand
promptandthenpressEnter.
Allpartswillbeselectedandtheprocesswillbegin.Whenthedataisall
read,allpartsthatwerewrittentothedatabasefilewillbeturned"off"in
themodelasacheckingstep.YoucanusetheProSteelRegencommandto
bringallitemsbackonscreen.

Exercise2:EditthePartsListDataandFormat
1

Mar-12

OpentheProSteelPartlistdialogbyselectingthemainmenuitem
ProSteel>Additions>Partlist.

309

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Lesson 2: Creating an External Parts List

SelectFile>OpenintheProSteelPartlistdialog.Loadthe
TRNMODEL.MBDdatabase.

Hint:ThepartlistwillbeC:\Program

Files\V8i_[SELECTseries]\ProSteel\MicroStation\Localised\[country]lis\
PartList.
ThePartlistProcessingdialogwillbepropagatedasshownbelowwith
possiblyunsorteddatafromthepartslist.Inthelist,eachpartisstored
individually,butacombinationofequalpositionswillbecarriedoutatthe
timeofprintout.Youcanopenseveralfilesatthesametime.Theopened
fileswillbedisplayedinthelistActDatabaseontheleftsideofthedialog.
Byclickingafilename,thefilewillbeyourcurrentworkfile.Theparts
containedintheworkfilearedisplayedontherightsideofthedialog.The
listofpartsgivesasurveyoftheentries.Byclickinganentrytwice,within
therighthandcolumn,anotherdialogwillbedisplayedwhichcontainsall
dataavailablewithrespecttotheentryconcerned.
Thisdatacanbeprocessedinthedialog.Whenclosingthedialog,theyare
imported,andIMMEDIATELYstoredinthefile.Endthedatarecordedby
clickingthecheckbutton.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

310

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson2:CreatinganExternalPartsList

Note:Youaremodifying"live"data.Anychangesyoumakewillreflectinthe

reportandwillnotbackupdatethemodel.
3

Mar-12

Inordertohaveamorerecognizablelist,selectthemenuitemFile>Sort
fromthewithinthedialogandthiswillloadthesortingdialogshown
below.Enterthefollowingparameters:

FirstKey:POS_NUMBER

SecondKey:ITEMNO

Sort:Ascending

311

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Lesson 2: Creating an External Parts List

PressOKandthesortingwillbeappliedandthedatabaseinformationwill
returntothedisplayandbesortedaccordingtooursettings.

Nowthatyouhavethedataloadedandsorted,youwillcreatetheformat
forourreport.Next,youwilltouchonthebasicsofreportformatsandnot
specificsettingswithintheformatfileitself.

SelectthemenuitemSettings>EditPartListDefinitionfromtheProSteel
Partlistdialog.

Whenthefileselectiondialogappears,opentheMETRIC.FREEPARTS.LST
file.
ThiswillloadtheDesignerwindowforthespecificreportthatyou
selected.Fromhereyoucanchangetheformat,title,groupingofparts,
colours,fonts,rows,andcolumnsetc.foreachtypeofreport.Experience
withreportwritertoolsisrequiredinordertogeneratethedesired
formatsneededbyyourcompany.Closethiswindowaswewillleavethis
uneditedinthisexercise.

SelectFile>ExittoreturntothePartsListProcessorforStructural3D
dialog.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

312

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson2:CreatinganExternalPartsList

Exercise3:GeneratetheReport
1

SelectthemenuitemDelivery>SelectSinglePartlistfromtheProSteel
Partlistdialog.Whenthedialogloads,selectMETRIC.FREEPARTS.LSTfrom
thelistofreportsandthenpressOpen

Note:Ifamessageregardingthepapersizeshoulddisplay,justcontinuewith

theprintingprocess.
2

Mar-12

ThePrintOptionsdialogshownbelowwilldisplay:

313

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Lesson 2: Creating an External Parts List

FromwithinthePrintOptionsdialog,changetheDirectTofieldtosend
thereporttoaPreview.PresstheStartbuttontobegintheprocessand
displaythereport.

SelecttheMagnifyingglassiconatthetoptozoominonthereports
content.Notehowthepartsaredisplayedinthereport.Whenfinished,
exitthisreportbypressingtheExitPreviewiconatthetopofthescreen.

Executetheprocedureagain,thistimechoosingadifferentreportformat.
Notethedisplayofthedata.

ExitanyreportsstillopenandwhenyoureturntotheProSteelPartlist
dialog,selectFile>Endtoexitthedatabaseeditor/reportgenerator.

Hint: ChangesmadeinthemodelafterthedatabaseisgeneratedWILLNOTupdate

thedatabase.Thereportshouldbereruntocapturetheneworchangeddata.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

314

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson3:CreatingaDrawingPartsList

Lesson3:CreatingaDrawingPartsList
Inthissection,youwilllearnhowtocreateapartslistthatcanbedropped
directlyontothemodelor2Ddrawings&modifythepartlistinformationto
display.

Exercise1:CreatetheDrawingPartsList
1

SelecttheInsertDrawingPartlisttoolfromProSteel>Additions>Insert
DrawingPartlist,orclickontheInsertDrawingPartlisticonfromthe
PartlistandExporttoolbar(alsoaflyoutfromtheEdittoolbar).

Whenprompttoselectobjects,type"all"andpressENTER.
Thepartlistwillnowbeinsertedwhereveryouclickwithyourcursor.
Makesurethe"Ortho"optionisselected.

Onceinserted,thedialogboxappears.Setthefirstpageasshowninthe
graphicbelow.

Mar-12

WewillnowcreateacompletelynewlistbymovingtotheListStylestab.
UndertheBentleyfolder,wewillcreatea"Training"listusingtheCreate
button.

315

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Lesson 3: Creating a Drawing Parts List

NowmovetotheLayouttabandmakesurethenewlycreatedlistis
selectedinthepulldownfield,thenclicktheeditingicon.

Thenewlyopeneddialogwillletuspersonalizethelayoutofthispartlist.
Setvaluesinthelowerareaasshowninthegraphicbelow.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

316

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson3:CreatingaDrawingPartsList

Descriptionsofthefieldsintheabovedialogareprovidedinthetablebelow:
Name

Description

Stylename

Thenameofthecurrentstyle;allmodificationsarerelatedtothisstyle.

DisplayList

Here,youseeanoverviewofalldisplayedcolumnsofthepartslist.Theyaredisplayed
inthisorderfromthelefttotherightinthedrawingpartslist.
Clickonthisbuttontomodifythelineselectedinthedisplaylist(partslistcolumn).
Clickonthisbuttontoaddanewline(partslistcolumn)totheendofthelist.
Clickonthisbuttontoaddanewline(partslistcolumn)infrontofthehighlightedline.
Clickonthisbuttontodeletetheselectedline(partslistcolumn)fromthelist.
Clickonthisbuttontoopenthefooternotesandextrainformationdialogbox.
Thearrowbuttonsareusedtomoveitemsupordownthelistifrequired.

Mar-12

317

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Lesson 3: Creating a Drawing Parts List

Name

Description

Valuessection

TextSize:Determinesthetextsizeindrawingunitsatascale1:1
HeightScaling:Increasestheheightofthelinesspacingbythisfactor.Dependingonthe
textstyle,thereadabilityofthepartslistisincreased
LeftMargin:Distanceofthetexttotheleftmarginatleftjustifiedinsertion.
RightMargin:Distanceofthetexttotherightmarginatrightjustifiedinsertion.
Offset:Distanceofthepartgrouppositionnumberentriesvsthegroupposition
number.
Rotation:Rotationofthewholelistbytheindicateddegrees
BlockSize:Indicatesafterhowmanylinesoftextahorizontallinehastobeinserted.
Thisonlyservesforacleareroverview.
Header:Additionaltitletoplaceontheverytopofthelist.

ColourFields

Hereyoucontrolthecoloursforvariouspartsofthetable.
MoveUp:Ifthisfieldischecked,thelistisrunningfromthebottomtothetop,i.e.the
columnheadersarebelow.
DivideGroups:Atgrouplists,thegroupsaredividedbyhorizontallines.Thesettings
under'BlockSize'donothaveanyinfluenceinthiscase.
AlignNumbersatright:Allnumericalvaluesarealignedtotherightmargin
Fillremainingwithzero:Allnumericalvaluesarefilledupwithzerosaccordingtothe
indicatedformatlengthanddigitsafterthedecimalpoint.
Header:Theheaderofthelistisused
TextStyle:Selectthedesiredtextstyle.PleaserefertotheMicroStationmanualfor
moredetailedinformationaboutMicroStationtextstyles.
Sort:Dependingonthefieldselectedhere,theoutputissortedinrisingorderfromthe
columnheaderonward.
Invert:Causesasortingindescendingorderfromthecolumnheaderonward.
UsePrefix:Atsorting,theentriesareseparatedinprefixandnumberandthensorted
separately

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

318

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson3:CreatingaDrawingPartsList

UsetheAddNewLineicontoopenuptheColumnsettingsdialog.
Completethepartlistinformationforeachfieldasshowninthefollowing
image:

Mar-12

319

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Lesson 3: Creating a Drawing Parts List

DescriptionsofthefieldsintheColumnsettingsdialogareprovidedinthetable
below:
Name

Description

FieldName

Select(doubleclick)thedesiredfieldfromthedatafields.

Name1

Thenameofthecolumnheaderrespectivetothefirstnameifanentryhasbeen
indicatedininputfieldName2aswell.Therearetworowsareavailablealtogether.

Name2

Thesecondnameofcolumnheader.

Length

Enterthedesiredcolumnwidthintextsigns.Theexactcolumnwidthdependsonthe
selectedtextstyle.

Dec.Point

Thenumberofdesiredpositionsafterthedecimalpoint.ForImperialprecision,usethe
followingguide:
1/2"=1,1/4"=2,1/8"=3,1/16"=4,1/32"=5,etc.

TextSize

Enterthetextsizeofthecolumn.Ifyouhaveenteredthevalue0,thegeneraltextsize
oftheliststyleisused.

Colour

Enterthecolourofthecolumntext(colournumber).Ifyouhaveenteredthevalue1,
thetextcolouroftheliststyleisused.

Position

Enterthealignmentofthecolumn:Left,Center,RightorAutomatic.IfAutomatichas
beenselected,alltextsarealignedtotheleftandalldigitsarealignedtotheright.

Units

EntertheunitformatMetric,ImperialorAutomatic.IfAutomatichasbeenselected,the
defaultunitsofthedrawingareused.

Nowwewilllookatthefooter,usingtheFootericon.
Fromherewecancontrolthefootertext,itscolor,size,alignment,andso
forth.
Wecanalsouseafactorvaluetocalculatepercentageadditions.
Itisalsopossiblefromheretomodifythecolorandprefixoftheheaderof
group,subgroupandassemblylistings.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

320

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson3:CreatingaDrawingPartsList

Descriptionsofthefieldsintheabovedialogareprovidedinthetablebelow:
Name

Description

Footer

Enterthedesiredfootlines.Youcanusepredefinedvariablesaswell.Thefollowing
variablesareavailableasfootlines:
$(N)Thenumberoflinesisindicated.
$(F)Multiplicationfactoradditionin%
$(L)Overalllengthofallpartswithoutaddition
$(LF)Overalllengthofallpartswithaddition
$(W)Overallweightofallpartswithoutaddition
$(WF)Overallweightofallpartswithaddition
$(P)Overallareatobepaintedofallpartswithoutaddition
$(PF)Overallareatobepaintedofallpartswithaddition

Mar-12

Addition

Percentagebywhichthedeterminedvalueshavetobeincreased.Theseincreased
valuescanbeoutputbymeansofthevariable$(?F).

Dec.Point.

Thenumberofdesiredpositionsafterthedecimalpoint.

321

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Lesson 3: Creating a Drawing Parts List

Name

Description

Offset

Thedistancetothecorrespondingmargin.

Colour

Enterthecolourofthetext(colournumber).Ifyouhaveenteredthevalue1,thetext
colouroftheliststyleisused.

Position

Enterthealignmentofthetext:Left,Center,RightorAutomatic.IfAutomatichasbeen
selected,alltextsarealignedtotheleftandalldigitsarealignedtotheright.

Units

EntertheunitformatMetric,ImperialorAutomatic.IfAutomatichasbeenselected,the
defaultunitsofthedrawingareused.

GroupRow

InthePrefixinputfield,youcanindicateaprefixforthepositionnumbersofgroup
lines.IntheColourinputfieldyoucanspecifythecolourofthegroupline.Ifthevalue
of1hasbeenindicatedhere,thenormaltextcolourwillbeused.Thesesettingscanbe
madeseparatelyforgroups,subgroupsandassemblies.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

322

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ModuleSummary

ModuleSummary
Youarenowableto:

Mar-12

SetthedefaultsforPositioning

DefinethePositionFlags

PositiontheModel

Createapartslist

Editthepartslistdataandformat

Generatetheactualreport

323

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Module Summary

Positioning and Material Takeoffs

324

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DetailCenter
ModuleOverview
Nowthatthemodellingprocessiscomplete,youcanbegintheprocessof
creatingtheframedeliverabledrawings.Theentireprocessisautomatedthrough
theProSteel2DDetailCenter.
Note: Donotconfusetheterm2DorDetailCenterwiththeprocessofsteeldetailing.

All2Doutputiscontrolledfromwithinthisfunction.Thinkofthisasthe
"DrawingProductionCentre".
ThismodulewillfocusontheformatanduseoftheDetailCenter.Youwillbriefly
touchonthespecificsofthedetailstylesusedtogeneratethedesiredresults.You
willlearnwhatcomprisestheDetailCenterandhowtouseittoproduceyour
engineeringdrawings.YouwillalsolearnhowtousetheDetailCentertoproduce
ManualorCustomdetails.ThetruepoweroftheDetailCenterisevidentwhen
youusetheDetailCentertocorrectyourexisting2Ddetailsafterachangeismade
inthemodel.
Therearefourlessonsinthismodule.Eachlessonbeginswithalistofobjectives
thatdefinetheinformationthatyouwilllearninthatlesson.Anumberof
exercisesareprovidedineachlessonthataredesignedtoteachyouthetopics
listedintheObjectivessectionatthestartofeachlesson.
Warning:Itisrecommendedthatyoustartthe3DmodelwithaSeedfile(*.dgn)containing
therequired"measurement"variablesetting,"units"setting,Textstyles,
Dimensionstyle,Displayclasses,Partfamilies,Areaclasses,andsoforth.For2D
drawinggeneration,ProSteeltakesallrequiredtextanddimensionstylesspecified
intheDetailStylefromthemodelandbringsthemovertothe2Ddrawing.The
seedfile(*.dgn)usedfor2Ddrawingsshouldbefreeoftextanddimensionstyles
exceptfortheborder/drawingframetextstylestoavoiderroneousresults.

Mar-12

325
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Module Prerequisites

ModulePrerequisites
ThiscourseisdesignedfortheexperienceduserofProSteelwhounderstandsand
iscapableofmodeling,grouping,andPartandfamilyandpositioningwith
ProSteel.Assuchtheparticipantshouldhaveaclearunderstandingoftheusage
ofMicroStationandtheWindowsoperatingsystem.

ModuleObjectives

Detail Center

LearnhowtoloadtheDetailCenter

LearnthebasicdesignoftheDetailCenter

Learnhowtoloadadetailstyletobegintheprocessofdetailingourstructure

326

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre

Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre

Exercise1:LoadingtheDetailCentre

InthisexerciseyouwilllearnhowtoloadtheDetailCenter.

Mar-12

OpentheexamplemodelTRNMODEL.dgn,locatedintheProject
ProSteel_Metric.

LoadtheDetailCenter(ProSteelmenu>2D>DetailCenter).Thiswillload
theDetailCenteranddisplaythecomponentsfromthemodel,aswellas
theframesthatweregeneratedwhenyoucreatedtheWorkframes.

327

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

WhatistheDetailCenter?
InProSteel,userscontrolthecomplete2Ddrawingandplangenerationfrom
withintheDetailCenterfromafirstoverviewofthecomponentstothe
workshopdrawingwithmultiplechangesandmanipulations.Thinkofthe
DetailCenterasaprogramwithintheprogrambecauseitoffersmanymore
possibilitiesandoptionsthanonecanseeatfirstglance.
WhenyouopentheDetailCenterforthefirsttime,youwillseeaclearlyorganized
dialogboxwithjustafewsettingoptions.Youreallydonotneedanythingelseat
thispointifyouhavealreadycustomizedtheprogrambecauserightnow,you
wanttoderiveyourworkshopplansfromthemodel.However,ifyouwantto,you
canpushintotheinnermostdepthsofthedrawingderivationatanytime.Youcan
setagreatvarietyofoptions;requestinformation;andmonitorandcheck
drawings.Thephilosophybehindthisdevelopmentisthatyoushouldbeableto
obtainthesameresultinavarietyofdifferentways,thatyoucanchangemany
elementsandoptionsbutthatyoudonothaveto.Thehighestpossiblelevelof
flexibilityforyouastheuserduringthefinalphaseofthedesignthatisthe
DetailCenter.

Detail Center

328

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre

InExercise2,youwilllearnthelayofthelandintheDetailCenter.

Level1:ThePartsTabOverview
Hereyouwillobtainanoverviewofthepartsofthemodelandtheirfunctional
associationsandrelationships.Youcanviewconstructiongroups,singlepartsor
wholeareasofthemodelallclearlystructuredinatreeformat.Thisistheplace
whereyoumanageandchangedetailstylesandlinkyourcomponentswiththese
stylesaswellasmanagethemodificationmechanism.Inaddition,the
DetailCenterislaunchedfromhere.

UnderthePartstabtherearethreedisplayareas:

Mar-12

329

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

Thefirstwindowislocateddirectlybelowtheiconsandisusedfor
informationalpurposesonly.Informationcannotbechangedoreditedin
thisdisplayandnoadditionalfunctionscanbeaccessedfromthisarea.

ThesecondwindowistheDetailStyleswindow.Thiswindowlistsallofthe
DetailStylescurrentlyloaded.FromhereDetailStylescanbecreated,
loaded,copiedorsavedwitharightclickwithinthewindowandselecting
theappropriateaction.TheDetailStylesarestoredherewithinfolders
calledthemes.ThesecanbeusedtosortDetailStylesbyclient,project,
etc.

Thelastwindowisalistofallactivemodelselements.Itisbytheactionof
draganddropfromthiswindowontotheappropriateDetailStylethat
creatingthe2Ddrawingsbegins.Thesorting,mentionedabove,canbe
donetotheitemsdisplayedinthiswindowsothatassigningthemto
DetailStylesbecomesfasterandeasier.Alsowitharightclickinthis
window,youcanupdateandopenany2Ddrawingsthathavebeen
created.

TheIconsareasfollows:
TheiconsonthePartstaballowyoutocontroltheinformationdisplayedbelowin
variousways.Eachoneservesaspecificfunctionandwillbecoveredinturn.
Whatisimportanttonoteatthispointisthateventhoughsomeiconsmay
appeartobeidenticalondifferenttabs,eachiconservesonlythetabithasbeen

Detail Center

330

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre

placedonto.Forexample,theiconofthewrenchononetabmaynotofferthe
sameoptionsastheiconofthewrenchonanothertab.Or,thesortingononetab
maybedifferentfromthesortingonanothertab.
Thefirsticon
onthePartstabisusedtorightclicktheselectedelement(s)
andmoveit(them)alongtothenextstage(tab).Thechosenitem(s)shouldfirst
haveaDetailStyleassignedtoit(them)beforethisoptionisused.
Thefirsticononthefirstthreetabs,Parts,ViewsandInsert,maylookdifferent
buteachperformsthesamefunction.Adraganddropofanitemonitwillmove
ittothenextstage(tab).
Therecursiveicon
allowsforallparentandchildelementstobeselectedat
thesametimeinthesametreelikestructure.

Forexample,ifitemsweresortedshowingtheassemblystructures,elements
makinguptheassemblywouldbelistedaschildelements.Withrecursiveturned
onwhentheassemblyischosen,theindividualelementsformingtheassembly
wouldalsobeselected.
Note: Thisfeatureshouldbedisabledwhenassigningdetailstylestodifferent

elementssothatsinglepartsdonotreceivethesamestylefordimensioningas
theassembledcomponentsdo.
Therecursiveiconisavailableonthefirstthreetabsandeachworkthesameway;
however,eachtabcanhaveitsrecursiveoptionsetonoroffindividually.

Mar-12

331

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

TheSortingicon
controlshowthelistofelementsfromthemodelis
displayed.Whenthisiconisused,adialogappearswhichallowsyoutodefine
howyouwouldlikethelistsorted.

WithinthisdialogyoucanfirstchoosebetweenPSStandardandUserDefined.
TheProSteelstandardoptionisnecessarytobeabletoselectviewsandplans,as
UserDefinedmethodswillnotlistthese.
Oncetheinitialdisplaytypehasbeenchosen,ifUserDefinedwasselected,then
thewindowonthelefthandsidenearthetopbecomesavailableandhowitems
aresortedcanbeselected.
Thewindowtotherightandthearrowsdirectlybelowareusedtocontrolwhich
methodsforsortingaremadeavailableandinwhichordertheyareperformedif
morethanonemethodisselected.
Thefiltersofthisdialogboxallowyoutofurtherlimittheitemsdisplayedby
selectingandsettingupargumentsthatmustbemetinordertobedisplayed.
Twoseparatefilterscanbesetupandusedifrequired.
Thefinalpartofthisdialogallowsforoptionalsettingstobedefined.Hereusers
canchangetheSortOrdertoascendingordescendingmethods,orselectno
sortingatall.

Detail Center

332

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre

TheoptionforShowentriesonly1xisalsoavailable.Thisoptionwilllistidentical
membersonlyonce.
NewpergroupwilllistidenticalmembersoncepergroupifShowentriesonly1x
isonandasmanytimesascreatedineachgroupifthisoptionisnoton.
TheGroupDisplaydropdownboxallowsfortheselectiontodisplayonlyparts,
onlygroupsorbothinatreestructure.
WithPreSortwilladddescriptionsasaparentheadingandsortitemsbelow
theseparentheadings.
ThelastsettingisNoemptyfolder,whichsimplyhidesanyfolderwithnothingin
it.
ProbablythebestusermethodforsortingthelistisbyPartDescriptionsorPart
Families.Keepinmindhoweverthatthedisplaytypeshouldbesetbackto
ProSteelStandardinordertoprocessanchorplans,elevations(orsections)and
plans.Alsoyouwillneedtokeepaneyeonwhethergrouporsingle'group
display'hasbeensetwhenusinguserdefinedsettings.
Thewrenchicon
isforsettings.Whenthisiconisselected,adialogboxwill
appearwithdifferentsettingsforyoutoselectfrom.

TheOverwriteprotectionoptionlocksdrawingsandstopsanyupdatesfrombeing
donetothem.Thisoptionshouldnotbeenabledunlessyouarecertainthatthe
drawingsbeingproducedwillbetothespecificationsrequiredandwillnotneed
tobemodified.
TheHideinpartlistoptionsimplyhidesanyitemplacedontoaDetailStyle.
ReopeningtheDetailCenterwillrefreshthelistshowingallelementsagain
includingthosethatwerehiddenusingthisoption.

Mar-12

333

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

Takeoverintoviewlistisnotarequiredoption,butdoesprovideameansof
movingitemsfromthePartstabtotheViewstabquicklyandefficiently.Withthis
optionenabled,anyelementplacedontoaDetailStylewillautomaticallybetaken
overtotheViewstabsavingyoufromhavingtodraganddroptothetoplefticon
forprocessing.
Inthefinalsectionofthisdialogboxaretwooptions:oneisforRestoremanual
changesifupdated,andtheotherisAlsodeletedimensions/labels.Itis
recommendedthattheseoptionsalwaysbeturnedon.Whathappensiftheyare
notturnedonisthatanymanualchangesordeletionstothe2Ddrawingwillbe
lostwhenanupdateisdone.Withthesechecked,allmanualchangeswouldbe
savedevenafteranupdatetothedrawinghasbeenperformed.
Thisicon
willrereadalltheinformationfromthemodelandrepopulatethe
displaywindowatthebottomofthePartstab.Itistheequivalentofclosingand
reopeningtheDetailCenter.Itisimportanttorememberhoweverthatitwillread
theinformationfromthewindowthatcurrentlyhasfocusandsoitisimportant
thatwhenusingthisoption,thewindowwiththemodelistheonecurrentlyopen
andselected.
Thisicon
willopenuptheDetailCenterExpress.Itisusedforautomatingthe
processof2Ddrawingcreation.Thisprocessinvolvesseveralpagesofinformation
beinganswered,externaltemplatesbeingmadeandthecreationofspecific
controlfiles.

Level2:TheViewsTabOverview

Detail Center

334

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre

OnceaDetailStyleisassignedinthepartstabandtheitembroughtoverfrom
there(eitherautomaticallyormanually),itwillappearinthistab.
TheViewstab'smainpurposeistoallowyoutopreviewthedrawingsina
WYSIWYGmodetoadjusttheDetailStylesassignedtothem,meaningDetailStyle
adjustmentscanbemadeandseendynamically.Thisway,userscanbesurethe
DetailStyleissetupproperlypriortoinsertingtheselecteditemintoa2D
drawing.
Note: Thepreviewshouldneverbesavedasa2Ddrawingsinceitisnotdirectlylinked

tothemodelandcannotbeupdatedifchangesaremadeinthemodel.

TheIcons
Theiconsshownaboveare:2D;Recursive;Sorting;Options;andCustomview.
The2Dicon
willtakeanyitemswhicharedraggedanddroppedonittothe
nextstage.AtthispointtheseitemsshouldbeavailableundertheInserttab.
TheRecursiveicon
worksinexactlythesamefashionasitdidunderthe
Partstab.Howeveritwillaffectonlyitemsunderthecurrenttab.
TheSortingicon
worksinexactlythesamefashionasitdidundertheParts
tab.Howeveritwillaffectonlyitemsunderthecurrenttab.
TheOptionsicon
bringsuptheoptionsavailableatthispoint.Inthiscasea
smalldialogboxappearswithonlyoneoption,Hidepartinmodel.Thiswillhide
thepartinthemodelonceithasbeenmovedtotheInserttab.

Mar-12

335

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

TheCustomViewicon
allowsforthecreationofacustomdetailviewtaken
fromthemodelthatcanincludepositionflagsandweldmarksymbols.The
creationoftheseviewswillbeexplainedinmoredetailinadifferentsection.

TheDisplayWindows

Whenyourightclickinthedisplaywindowonapart,grouporview,asmallmenu
willappear.FromheretheoptionsPreviewandEditDetailStyleareavailable.
Thesearetheprimaryoptionsandthereasonforthistab.
Inadditiontotheseoptions,ausercancreateAdditionalViewsandDisplayInfo.
AdditionalViewsallowsforthecreationofacustomdetailviewtakenfromthe
modelthatcanincludepositionflagsandweldmarksymbols.Thecreationof
theseviewswillbeexplainedinmoredetailinadifferentsection.

Detail Center

336

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre

TheDisplayInfooptionsimplyopensanotherwindowwithalltheinformation
abouttheselecteditem.Itisforinformationalpurposesonly.
ThefirstoptionisCreate2D.Whenusingthisitisthesameasthedraganddrop
ofselecteditemsontothe2Diconatthetopleftinthatitwillmovetheselected
itemsovertotheInserttab.

Level3:TheInsertTab(DetailBlock)Overview
TheInserttabiswherealltheparts,groupsandviewsgetplacedinto2D
drawings.
Thefirststepistostartandsaveanewdrawing.Then,youwillselecttheitemsto
beplacedinthisdrawinganddraganddropthemontheiconinthetopleft
corner.Thenextstepistoplacethe2DDetailwithinthenewdrawing.Once
finished,savethedrawingagainandprocessthesamewayadrawingisnormally
processedunderMicroStation.

TheIcons
Theiconsshownaboveare:DragandDrop;Recursive;Sorting;Options;Reload;
InsertAssistant;andExchange.
TheDragandDropicon
letsyouindicatewherethefilesshouldbe
draggedanddroppedintothedrawing.

Mar-12

337

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

TheRecursiveicon
worksinexactlythesamefashionasitdidundertheParts
tab.Howeveritwillaffectonlyitemsunderthecurrenttab.
TheSortingicon
worksinexactlythesamefashionasitdidundertheParts
tab.Howeveritwillaffectonlyitemsunderthecurrenttab.
TheOptionsicon
bringsuptheavailableoptionsatthispoint.Inthiscasea
smalldialogboxappearswithtwooptions.

Thefirstoptionwillremovethepartfromthelistonceithasbeenplacedintoa
2Ddrawing.
ThesecondoptiondetermineswhetherUSMarkNumberingwillbeusedornot.
Thefieldsbelowthesecondoptionareinformationalonly.
TheReloadsicon
window.

reloadsallthedetailblocksandupdatesthedisplay

TheInsertAssistanttool
canbeusedtoautomaticallyinsertitemsonto
multipledrawings.Thisrequiresacertainamountofsetupandisnotcoveredin
thebasiccourse.
TheExchangeicon
block.

opensadialogboxwhichletsyouexchangeoreditadetail

TheDisplayWindows

Detail Center

338

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre

TherearethreewindowsundertheInserttab.Eachwindowisdescribedbelow.

Thefirstwindowisinformationalonlyandnoadditionfunctionsexistfrom
here.

Thesecondwindowdisplaysafolderview.Eachfolderrepresentsa3D
modelthathasbeenpreparedfor2Dinsertion.Thenameofthefolders
shouldbethesameasthenamesofthe3Ddgnfilescontainingthe
models.Arightclickinthiswindowwillallowyoutodeleteafolderor
'detaildictionary'completely.

Thethirdwindowdisplayseverythingcontainedwithinthefolderthathas
beenselectedintheabovewindow.Ifnofoldersareselectedthenthis
windowwillshownoelements.

Arightclickinthethirdwindowwillbringupasmalldropdownmenu.From
thereyougetfourchoices(dependingonthehighlightedelementwhentheright
clickisdone).
Insert2Dwillallowyoutodirectlyinserttheselectedobject(s)intothe2D
drawingwithouttheneedtodraganddroptotheiconinthetoplefthandcorner.
Previewwillbringupapreviewofwhatthedetailblockis.Thisisnotthe2Ddgn
andshouldnotbesavedbutratherdiscarded.Theblockshouldbeinsertedintoa
2Ddrawingandthensaved.

Mar-12

339

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

Deleteentryfromdetaillibrarywillremovetheselectedentriessothattheyno
longerareavailableinthewindowforselection.Iftheyneedtobeinsertedintoa
drawinginthefuturethenyouwillhavetogobacktoatleasttheviewtabifnot
furtherandbringthemovertotheInserttaboncemore.
DisplayInfoopensawindowcontaininginformationabouttheparticulardetail
block.Thewindowthatopensisinformationalonly.

TheSettingsTab
TheSettingstabisdedicatedtotheglobalbehaviouralsettingsofthe
DetailCenter,includingtemplatesandconfigurationfiles.

ColourCodingthroughoutthetabs

Detail Center

GREY:Partsnotprocessed

340

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre

BLUE:Thedetailblockofthepartwascreated;itisnotinsertedinthe2D
drawinganddoesnotneedupdating.

YELLOW:Thedetailblockofthepartwascreated;itisnotinsertedinthe2D
drawinganditneedsupdating.

GREEN:Thedetailblockofthepartwascreated;itisinsertedinthe2D
drawinganditdoesnotneedupdating.

RED:Thedetailblockofthepartwascreated;itisinsertedinthe2Ddrawing
anditneedsupdating.

InformationWindow:

Thereisalsoaninformationwindow,whichwillbedisplayedifyourightclickon
oneofthecomponentslistedinthePartstablistandselectDisplayInfo.This
informationwindowisassignedtoallthreeworklevelsandshowsthecurrent
statusoftheentry.Dependingonthelist,thiswindowdisplaysthenameandtype
ofthepart,dataofdetailing,insertionlocation,currentstatus,andmuchmore.

ContextMenu
AsupplementtoeverylevelisalevelspecificContextMenuaccessiblethrough
therightmousebutton,whichlistsonlythosefunctionsthataresignificanttothe
respectivelist.Thisoptionoffersthefastestwaytoaccessacommand.

Mar-12

341

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

DetailStyles

Thedetailstylesarethecornerstoneoftheentiredetailingprocess.Theydescribe
howapartistolookasaworkshopdetailorhowthemodelistoappearasan
overview.Thecontentofthestylesisdescribedinsomedetailinthenextlesson.

Preview

Thedetailingofaselectedpartcanbepreviewedfromwithintheview'soverview
ordirectlyfromwithinthemodel.ThiswillcreateasmallMicroStationView
displayingtheexactresultofthedetailstylesettingsappliedtothispart.The

Detail Center

342

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre

smalldrawingshowshowthepartwillbedetailed.Thiswindowanditsdrawing
canbeWindowsorqueriedforinformationbecauseitisanindependent
MicroStationdrawing.Sinceyoucannowopenthispart'sdetailstyle,youcan
tracktheeffectsofdifferentstylesettingsinrealtime.Youcallthisfinetuningof
thedetailstyle.Ifyouopenthepreviewforanotherpartyoudonothavetoclose
thiswindowfirst.Thecontentisupdatedautomatically.

OpentheDetailCenterPartSettingdialog(Parttab>Pressthe
DetailCenterSettingsicon).

Settheparametervaluesasshownbelow.

Whenfinished,clickthecheckmarktoclosethesettingsdialog.

Exercise3:LoadingaDetailStyle

Inthisexercise,youlearnhowtoloadadetailstyleinordertobeginthedetailing
process.Youwillalsobrieflylookatthespecificsofthedetailstyleitself.
1

Mar-12

FromwithinthePartstaboftheDetailCenter,selectanyStyleinthe
DetailStyleswindow.ThenrightclickthemousetodisplaytheContext
menu.

343

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

Fromthecontextmenu,selectLoad/Save>LoadStyle(s).

Whenthedialogappearstoloadastyle,selectthe
AUS_Engineering_Plansstyle.ThiswillloadthestyleintotheDetailCenter
underitsoriginalthemeorcurrentlyselectedtheme,dependingonthe
selectionmadeinthisdialogbox.

NowthattheAUS_Engineering_Plansstyleisloadedyouwillbriefly
reviewitscontent.Thiscanbedonebyeitherdoubleclickingthestyle
nameorhighlightingthestyleandthenrightclickingthemouseand
selectingEditDetailStylefromthecontextmenu.

OpentheAUS_Engineering_Plansstyleandreviewthecontentsofthis
style.

Thedetailingstyleoffersyousomedecisiveinfluenceoverthestyleofthe
detailingbecauseitisherethatyoudeterminewhatistobedimensioned,howto
dimensionit,whattextstoinclude,whethertoattachpositionflags,andsomuch
more.Over200parametersareavailabletospecifytheappearanceofyour
drawing.
Youcansaveandloadthesestylesindividuallyandevenimportorexportthem
fromthirdparties.Sinceitispossibletomanageentireparameterrecordsyoucan

Detail Center

344

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson1:LoadingandReviewingthe2DDetailCentre

createspecificstylesforspecificdetailingtasks(e.g.,foroverviews,workshop
plans,lifesizeddisplays,etc.)andjustselectthemlater.Yourmaintaskconsistsof
definingthesuitablestylesonce.Theprogramofferstheoptiontoimmediately
checkeachchangeusingapreviewfeatureuntildetailslookexactlylikeyouwant
themtobe.
Note: Understandthatcreatingadetailstylecantakesometimeandshouldnotbe

rushed.UsethePreviewfunctiontoverifythesettings.Allowsufficienttimeto
createthestyleforyourdesiredoutput.Intheend,timespentupfrontwillpay
offinquicktimesavingdrawingproduction.

SavingStyles
Normally,thedetailingstylesaresavedtogetherwiththedrawing.Thismeans
thatyoualwayshavetosaveyourmodelifthemodificationsofdetailingstyles
aretobekeptpermanently.Thereis,however,thepossibilitytowriteadetailing
styleasafileontheharddriveandtoreimportitfromthere.Thispermitsyouto
exchange,updateoreventransferthedetailingstylesofdifferentmodels.
Furthermore,youcancreateacollectionofdetailingstyles,andinthemodeluse
onlyaselectionofthosestylesthatarerequiredforthatmoment.

GeneralInfo
Ifyoudoubleclickonadetailstyle,adialogwithseveraltabsdisplaysinwhich
theindividualparametersareorganizedaccordingtodifferentareas.Someofthe
tabshavetabsthemselves,whichareusedforspecialsettings.Theseareusually
infrequentlyusedsettingsandarethusremovedbyafewextramouseclicks.You
donothavetotakecaretocloseallofthesedialogsbecausetheprogramcloses
themautomaticallywhenyouselectadifferenttab.

Mar-12

345

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing

Lesson2:AssigningaViewtoaStyleandCreatinga2D
DeliverableDrawing
Objectives
Theobjectivesofthislessonareasfollows:

Learnhowtoassignaviewtoadetailstyle.

LearnhowtoprocessaviewthroughtheDetailCenter.

FurtherusetheMultipleDocumentInterfacetocreateyour"deliverable"
drawing.

Completetheprocessbysavingyourdrawingandyourmodel,andreviewing
thedisplayoftheDetailCenterandusingittodeterminethestatusofaview.

Exercise1:AssigningaviewtoaDetailStyle

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtoassigntheviewtothedetailstyle.

Detail Center

FromwithintheDetailCenterPartstab,selecttheFR1_TOPview.Withthe
viewhighlighted,draganddroptheviewontotheAUS_Engineering_Plans
style.TheViewinthePartstabwillhaveacheckmarknexttoit.Thisis
yoursignalthattheviewhasbeenassignedtoastyle.

PickontheviewFR1_TOPandthenwiththearrowonthehighlighted
framename,rightclickandaccessthecontextmenu.Fromwithinthe
contextmenu,selectDisplayInfo.Thiswillloadtheinformationdialogand
youwillseethestylenamedthathasbeenappliedtotheframe.

Closedialog.

346

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson2:AssigningaViewtoaStyleandCreatinga2DDeliverableDrawing

Exercise2:ProcessingtheviewthroughtheDetailCentre

Inthisexercise,youwilllearnhowtoprocesstheviewFR1_TOPthroughthe
DetailCenter.
1

FromwithintheDetailCenter,selecttheViewstab.Whenthedisplay
changestothecontentsoftheViewstabyouwillseetheFR1_TOPviewin
thecurrentviewssectionofthetab.

AtthispointyoucanpreviewtheresultsoftheAUS_Engineering_Plans
detailstyle.HighlighttheFR1_TOPviewthenrightclickthemouseto
accessthecontextmenu.FromthemenuselectPreview.Thiswillopen
thepreviewofthedetail.

Note: Ifthetextsizesofthedimensionsanddescriptionsarenotproportionatetothe

drawing,youcanchangethis.Closethepreviewwithoutsavingthechanges.
Next,rightclickthemousewhileinthemodelandselectProSteel>Options.
HighlighttheShapes>ShapeLabeloptionandchecktheTextSizeandDistance
(try5mmfortextand3fordistance).
Hint: Atthistimeyoucanopenthedetailstyleusedtocreatetheviewbyselecting

EditStylefromthecontextmenuwhenyourightclickontheselectedviewand
makechangestothestyleandwatchasthechangesupdateinthecreated
view.Thisservesasagreatconstructiontoolwhendefiningdetailstyles.

Mar-12

Beforecontinuingthroughtheprocessyoumustclosethepreview
window.Todothis,presstheXinthecornerofthePreviewwindowand
whenpromptedtosavethecontentsofthepreview,pressNo.

ThenextstepinthedetailingprocessistopasstheviewontotheInsert
tabandallowProSteeltoprocesstheviewintoanintelligentblock.Backin

347

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing

theViewstaboftheDetailCenteryoucaneitherdraganddropthe
FR1_TOPviewontotheStartdetailingofselectedPartsbuttonorhighlight
theFR1_TOPviewandrightclickthemousebuttonandthenselectCreate
2Dformthesubmenu.Thesystemwilltakeamomenttoprocesstheview
throughtheDetailCenter.
5

SwitchtotheInserttaboftheDetailCenter.InthesectionlabelledDetail
directorypicktheTRNMODELlisted.Thiswillrefreshtheviewandinthe
lowerhalfofthetablabelledDetailBlocks,yourFR1_TOPviewwillappear.
Atthispointtheviewisreadytoinsertintoadeliverabledrawing.

Exercise3:PreparingtheDeliverableDrawingtoAcceptyourDetailBlock

Inthisexercise,youlearnhowtocreateanew"deliverable"drawingandinserta
border.
1

Detail Center

FromtheMicroStationmenuselectFile>New.

348

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson2:AssigningaViewtoaStyleandCreatinga2DDeliverableDrawing

WhentheMicroStationNewdialogdisplays,browseandselecttheseedfile
ProSteel3DV8iMetric.dgnfromprojectSeeddirectory.ThenclickOpen.

Mar-12

Afterthenewdrawingiscreated,saveTRNDET1.

Youwillnotbeabletoinsertthedetailintothenewdrawinguntilithasa
validdrawingname,asthenameislinkedtotheiteminthe3Dmodel.
ProSteelwillwarnyouthatthedrawinghasnotbeensaved.

349

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing

Detail Center

Nowforthebordercreatenew2Dsheetmodel:fromMicroStationmenu,
selectFile>Modelstocreatenewsheetmodel.

350

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson2:AssigningaViewtoaStyleandCreatinga2DDeliverableDrawing

Mar-12

NextstepistoReferencethebordersheet(File>References>Tools>
Attached).

BrowsetotheFormatdirectoryandselectA0QUER.DGN,thenclickOpen.

351

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing

Settheattachmentasbelow.

NowwehaveanA0bordersheetwhichwecanReferenceinserted
FR1_TOP.Wecanreferenceotherplans,elevationordetailsinsertedto
Modeltothebordersheet.

ClosethedetailsheetTRNDET1.dgn.

Exercise4:InsertingyourViewDetailintoyourDeliverableDrawing

Inthisexerciseyouwilllearnhowtoinserttheviewintoyourdrawing,savethe
viewandmodel,andreviewthe2DDetailCentersettings.

Detail Center

OpenTRNDET1.dgn.FromtheMicroStationmenu,selectFile>Models
andselectModel.UsetheTopView.

FromtheDetailCenterInserttab,selecttherequiredversionofthe
FR1_TOPview,aseachtimeyouprocesstheviewyouwillcreateanew
dateandtimestampedversion.Nowmakethe2Ddrawingcreatedinthe
previousexerciseyourcurrentdrawing.Highlighttherequiredviewthen
rightmouseclickandselectInsert2Dfromthesubmenu.Afterdoingthis,
acheckmarkwillappearbesidetheview.

352

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson2:AssigningaViewtoaStyleandCreatinga2DDeliverableDrawing

Theblockwillappearasaghostimageinthemodelarea.
3

Mar-12

Usethemousetopositiontheblockinthedesiredposition,thenleftclick
toplaceitinthedrawing.Whenfinishedtheviewshouldbeinthe
drawingandappearsimilartothefigurebelow.

353

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing

Note:TheinsertpositioncanbesetwithintheDetailStyle.

Detail Center

SwitchbacktothePartstaboftheDetailCenter.Reloadthemodelintothe
DetailCenterusingtheReloadicon.NotethattheFR1_TOPviewisnow
highlightedingreen.Thisdenotesthattheviewhasbeenprocessed,
residesinadrawing,andisuptodate.

WithinthePartstab,highlighttheFR1_TOPviewthenrightclicktoaccess
thecontextmenu.FromwithinthecontextmenupickDisplayInfo.Note

354

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson2:AssigningaViewtoaStyleandCreatinga2DDeliverableDrawing

howtheinformationdialogfortheviewnowcontainsthedrawingthat
thedetailresidesonaswellasthepath.

Mar-12

ToplacetheTOPPlaninthebordersheet:fromtheMicroStationmenu,
selectFile>ModelsandselectTOPPLAN.

355

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing

Detail Center

Referencethemodel(File>References>Tools>Attached)andselect
TRNDET1.

356

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson2:AssigningaViewtoaStyleandCreatinga2DDeliverableDrawing

Mar-12

Selectthemodelasshownbelow(livenestingon).

LocatethePlanintheborderasshownbelow.

357

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing

Exercise5:InsertingaDetailintoaDrawingSheet

Inthisexerciseyouwilladdacomponentdetailfromyourmodeltoadrawing
sheet.
1

Fromthe2DDetailCenterPartstab,confirmthattheAUS_BEAMS
DetailStylehasbeenloaded.Ifithasnot,rightmouseclicktodisplaythe
contextmenu.Fromthecontextmenu,selectLoadDetailStyle(s).When
thedialogappears,selecttheAUS_BEAMSstyle.Thiswillloadthestyle
intotheDetailCenter.

FromwithinthemodelselectthebeamthatislocatedongridlineA.Right
mouseclickandselectPSSearch/SelectSinglePart.Thiswillhighlightthe
partinthecomponentlist.

Detail Center

358

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson2:AssigningaViewtoaStyleandCreatinga2DDeliverableDrawing

Mar-12

Makesureyouselectthetoplevel(theGroupitem)fromthelist.

FromwithintheDetailCenterPartstab,selectthehighlightedcomponent
anddraganddropitontotheAUS_BEAMSstyle.Thecomponentwillhave
acheckmarknexttoit.Thisisyoursignalthatthecomponenthasbeen
assignedtoastyle.

FromwithintheDetailCenter,selecttheViewstab.Whenthedisplay
changestothecontentsoftheViewstabyouwillseethecomponentin
thecurrentviewssectionofthetab.

AtthispointyoucanpreviewtheresultsoftheAUS_BEAMSdetailstyle.
Highlightthecomponent,thenrightclicktoaccessthecontextmenu.
FromthemenuselectPreview.Thiswillinvokethepreviewofthedetail.

Closethepreviewwindow.Whenpromptedtosavethecontentsofthe
preview,pressNO.

ThenextstepinthedetailingprocessistoswitchtotheInserttaband
allowProSteeltoprocesstheviewintoanintelligentblock.Backinthe
ViewstaboftheDetailCenter,eitherdraganddropthecomponentview
ontotheCreateDetailBlocksbuttonorrightmouseclickandselectCreate
2Dfromthesubmenu.Thesystemwilltakeamomenttoprocesstheview
throughtheDetailCenter.

359

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing

SwitchtotheInserttaboftheDetailCenter.UndertheDetailDirectory
node,selecttheTRNMODELlisted.Thiswillrefreshtheviewandinthe
lowerhalfofthetabundertheDetailBlocksnode,yourcomponentwill
appear.Atthispointtheviewisreadytoinsertintoadeliverabledrawing.

10 StartaNewBlankDrawingandsaveitasTRNDET2.
11 FromwithintheInserttaboftheDetailCenter,selecttherequireddate

andtimestampedversionofcomponentview.Youcandraganddropthe
viewnameontotheInsertDetailBlockbuttonlocatedatthetopofthe
tab,oryoucanrightclickandselectinsert2Dfromthesubmenu.
12 Theblockwillappearasaghostimageinthedrawing.Usethemouseto

positiontheblockintothedesiredposition,thenleftclicktoplacethe
blockinthedrawing.
13 Savethedetailsheet.Usingthewindowmenu,selecttheTRNMODEL.

Whenthisbecomesactive,saveitaswell.
14 SwitchbacktothePartstaboftheDetailCenter.Notethattheobjectis

nowhighlightedingreen.Greendenotesthattheviewhasbeen
processed,andnowresidesinadrawing.
15 InthePartstab,highlighttheobject,thenrightclicktoaccessthecontext

menu.SelectDisplayInfo.Notehowtheinformationdialogfortheview
nowcontainsthedrawingthatthedetailresidesonaswellasthepath.

Detail Center

360

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Lesson3:ModifyingtheModelandAutomaticallyUpdatingtheDetailDrawings

Lesson3:ModifyingtheModelandAutomaticallyUpdatingthe
DetailDrawings
Objectives
Theobjectivesofthislessonareasfollows:

LearnhowtousethepoweroftheDetailCentertoupdatethedetailswhen
themodelchanges

Exercise1:ModifyingtheModel

Inthisexercise,youwillmodifythemodelandchangeashapesize.
1

OpenTRNMODEL.DGN.

Windowonfront530UB82crossbeamlocatedatgridlineA,atthetopof
theFR1frame.

Pickthe530UB82andedittheshape.Changetheshapetoa610UB125.
Whenthemodelupdates,pressthecheckbuttontoendthemodification
process.

ClicktheReloadicontoreloadthemodelinto2DDetailCenter.Notethat
thetwoviewsyouprocessedthroughtheDetailCenterarenowflaggedin
red.ThismeansthatProSteelhasreadthemodelfileandknowsthat
theseitemsareinsertedinadetailsheetandthattheynolongermatch
themodel.

Toupdatethedetailsheetwheretheseblocksreside,selectthetwo
blocksflaggedred(usetheCTRLkeytomakethemultipleselection).
Rightclickononeofthetwoblocksandwhenthecontextmenuopens,
selectUpdate2DDrawings.

Tocheckifthe2Ddetailhasbeenchanged,highlightthecomponent,then
rightclickandfromthecontextmenuselectOpen2Ddrawing.
Thedrawingassociatedtothiscomponentwillbedisplayed.Notethatthe
detailsheetnowreflectstheupdatesmadetothemodel.

Mar-12

SaveboththemodelanddetailsheetandclosetheDetailCenter.Also
notethatthemodifiedcomponentsnowappearingreenbecausethey
nowreflectthemodelagain.

361

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Center

Lesson 3: Modifying the Model and Automatically Updating the Detail Drawings

Detail Center

362

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DetailStyles
ModuleOverview
TheDetailStylesprogramoffersyousomedecisiveinfluenceoverthestyleofthe
detailingbecauseitisherethatyoudeterminewhatistobedimensioned,howto
dimensionit,whattextstoinclude,whethertoattachpositionflags,andmuch
more.
Agreatnumberofparametersareavailabletospecifytheappearanceofyour
drawing.Youcansaveandloadthesestylesindividuallyandevenimportor
exportthemfromotherusers.Sinceitispossibletomanageentireparameter
recordsyoucancreatespecificstylesforspecificdetailingtasks(e.g.for
overviews,workshopplans,lifesizeddisplays,etc.)andjustselectthemlater.
Yourmaintaskconsistsofdefiningthesuitablestylesonce.Theprogramoffers
theoptiontoimmediatelycheckeachchangeusingapreviewfeature(see
DetailCenterPreview)untildetailslookexactlylikeyouwantthemtobeforyour
requirements.

SavingStyles
Normally,theDetailStylesaresavedtogetherwiththe3Dmodelofthedrawing.
Thismeansthatyoualwayshavetosaveyourmodelifthemodificationsof
DetailStylesaretobekeptpermanently.
YoucanwriteaDetailStyleasafileontheharddriveandreimportitintoother
models.Youcanalsoreplaceonlypartialsectionsofastyle.Thispermitsyouto
exchange,updateortransfertheDetailStylesofdifferentmodels.Furthermore,
youcancreateacollectionofDetailStylesanduseonlythosestylessuitablefor
yourparticularmodellingrequirements.

Mar-12

363
Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Styles

Module Prerequisites

PartialLoadingofStyleParameters
If,forexample,youwanttocombinethedefaultsettingsfordimensioningand
thedefaultsettingsforlabellingoftwoexistingstylestocreateanewstyle,you
candothisbypartialloadingofpages.
Selectthedesiredpageintheselectiontreeandthencallthecontextmenuby
pressingtherightmousebutton.Nowyoucanreplacetheparametersofthe
currentlyselectedpagebytheequivalentparametersofanexistingstylefile.
Alternatively,youcanalsoloadallthepagessubordinatetothispagetoreplacea
muchbiggersetofparameters.

ModulePrerequisites
ThiscourseisdesignedfortheexperienceduserofProSteelwhounderstandsand
iscapableofmodeling,grouping,assigningPartdescriptionandPartfamilies,
positioningandusingDetailCenterwithProSteel.Assuchtheparticipantshould
haveaclearunderstandingoftheusageofMicroStationandthewindows
operatingsystem.

ModuleObjectives

Detail Styles

CreateAnchorplanstylesetting

CreateShapesingledetailstylesetting

CreateBeamGroupDetailstylesetting

CreateElevationDetailstylesetting

364

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Example1:AnchorPlan

Example1:AnchorPlan
DefaultSettings

Mar-12

365

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Styles

Example 1: Anchor Plan

Detail Styles

366

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Example1:AnchorPlan

2DDisplay

Mar-12

367

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Styles

Example 1: Anchor Plan

Detail Styles

368

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Example1:AnchorPlan

Dimensions

Mar-12

369

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Styles

Example 1: Anchor Plan

Thisdialogallowsustosetthedistancesfromthedetailtothefirstdimensionand
subsequentdimensions,foranumberofdifferentdimensioninglocations.

Detail Styles

370

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Example1:AnchorPlan

Descriptions

Mar-12

371

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Styles

Example 1: Anchor Plan

SampleAnchorPlanDrawing
Notethatallthedimensionsaretruelength,butthebaseplateshavebeenscaled
upsoyoucanseetherequireddetailoftheholes;otherwisethedimensions
wouldbetoosmalltosee.Wehavealsorequestedthatthegridsbedisplayed.

Detail Styles

372

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Example2:SinglePartDetailStyle

Example2:SinglePartDetailStyle

2DDisplay

Mar-12

373

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Styles

Example 2: Single Part DetailStyle

Dimensions

Detail Styles

374

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Example2:SinglePartDetailStyle

Descriptions
TheDescriptionsdialogforbothPositioningFlagsandWeldFlagsdoesnotrequire
anyinputaswehavetoldDetailCenternottoincludePositionandWeldflags
fromwithintheDefaultSettingsdialog.

Mar-12

375

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Styles

Example 2: Single Part DetailStyle

SampleShapeDetailDrawing

Detail Styles

376

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Example3:BeamGroupDetail

Example3:BeamGroupDetail
DefaultSettings

Mar-12

377

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Styles

Example 3: Beam Group Detail

2DDisplay

Detail Styles

378

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Example3:BeamGroupDetail

Descriptions

Mar-12

379

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Styles

Example 3: Beam Group Detail

Detail Styles

380

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Example3:BeamGroupDetail

Dimensions

Mar-12

381

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Styles

Example 3: Beam Group Detail

SampleGroupShapeDetailDrawing

Detail Styles

382

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Example4:MarkingElevationDetail

Example4:MarkingElevationDetail
DefaultSettings

Mar-12

383

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Styles

Example 4: Marking Elevation Detail

2DDisplay

Detail Styles

384

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

Example4:MarkingElevationDetail

Descriptions

Mar-12

385

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Styles

Example 4: Marking Elevation Detail

SampleMarkingPlanDetailDrawing

Detail Styles

386

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

AppendixABentleyProSteel
CourseSetup
ModuleOverview
ThisappendixprovidesstandardBentleyProSteelcoursesetupinstructions.An
overviewofthecourseisalsoprovided.

ViewTools
ThetoolsavailableintheProSteelViewtoolbarareasfollows:
OverviewTools
Name

Description
IsometricOverviews1
IsometricOverviews2
IsometricOverviews3
IsometricOverviews4
IsometricOverviews5

ViewTools
Name

Description
SelectView

Mar-12

387

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

View Tools

ObjectViewTools
Name

Description
ObjectViewatPoint
ObjectViewatCentre
FaceViewatPoint
FaceViewatCentre

ClipPlaneTools
Name

Description
ClipPlaneOff
ClipPlaneOn
ClipPlaneDistance
ClipPlaneFlip
ClipPlaneDefault

AnalysisTools
Name

Description
AnalysisEffectiveLines

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup

388

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ViewTools

ObjectUCSTools
Name

Description
ObjectUCSatCentre
ObjectUCSatPoint
FaceUCSatCentre
FaceUCSatPoint

DisplayClassesTools
Name

Description
DisplayClasses
Hide
HideGroup
HideExcept
HideGroupExcept
ProSteelRegen
AreaClasses
PartFamilies
ProcessStatus

Mar-12

389

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Element Tools

ElementTools
ThetoolsavailableintheProSteelElementstoolbarareasfollows:
GeneralTools
Name

Description
Plates
Shape
Bolts
EndPlate
BasePlate
ShearPlate
Splice
PurlinConnection
Stiffeners
Haunch
WebAngle

BracingTools
Name

Description
BracingStatic
BracingDynamic
GussetPlate

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup

390

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

ElementTools

StructuralObjectTools
Name

Description
Stairs
Frame
Purlins
Handrails
Trusses
Ladders
Joists
DistributeRoof/WallPanels

Mar-12

391

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Edit Tools

EditTools
ThetoolsavailableintheProSteelEdittoolbarareasfollows:
GeneralTools
Name

Description
Drill
Modify
Copy/Move/Mirror/Align
Groups
UnfoldPipes

PrimitiveTools
Name

Description
Box
Sphere
Cylinder
Cone
Extrude
Rotate
ConicalPipes
Torus

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup

392

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

EditTools

BooleanTools
Name

Description
Union
Subtract
Intersect
SubtractIntersectBody

PositioningTools
Name

Description
Positioning
PositionCompareParts
SearchParts

PartlistandExportTools
Name

Description
ProjectManagement
CreatePartlistDatabase
CreatePartlist
InsertDrawingPartlist
GroupContainmentList
NCData
ERPData

Mar-12

393

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Edit Tools

Name

Description
Import
Export
CreatePartlistPart
CreateUserShape
DrawingInformationTable

CollisionDetectionTools
Name

Description
CollisionDetection
CentreofGravity
MotionSimulation

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup

394

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

UtilityTools

UtilityTools
ThetoolsavailableintheProSteelUtilitytoolbarareasfollows:
GeneralTools
Name

Description
Workframe
ElevationSymbol
WeldingSymbol
ChangeLanguage

DetailTools
Name

Description
DetailCenter
DrawingBorder
2DSection
AutomaticCut
CrankedView
2DShortening
BenchMark
NativeFile
BatchNativeFile

Mar-12

395

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Utility Tools

Name

Description
SolidFile
BatchSolidFile

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup

396

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DetailStyleDialogs

DetailStyleDialogs

Mar-12

397

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Style Dialogs

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup

398

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DetailStyleDialogs

Mar-12

399

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Style Dialogs

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup

400

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DetailStyleDialogs

Mar-12

401

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Style Dialogs

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup

402

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DetailStyleDialogs

Mar-12

403

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Style Dialogs

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup

404

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DetailStyleDialogs

Mar-12

405

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Style Dialogs

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup

406

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DetailStyleDialogs

Mar-12

407

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Style Dialogs

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup

408

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DetailStyleDialogs

Mar-12

409

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Style Dialogs

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup

410

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DetailStyleDialogs

Mar-12

411

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Style Dialogs

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup

412

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DetailStyleDialogs

Mar-12

413

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Style Dialogs

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup

414

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DetailStyleDialogs

Mar-12

415

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Style Dialogs

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup

416

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

DetailStyleDialogs

Inthemainmenu,selectProSteel>ProSteelOptions.

IntheProSteelOptionsdialog,selectShapes>ShapeLabel.

CheckNote2.

Seethedialogonthenextpage.

Mar-12

417

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup


Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Detail Style Dialogs

Appendix A - Bentley ProSteel Course Setup

418

Copyright 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Mar-12

S-ar putea să vă placă și